mini countryman plug-in hybrid. owner's manual....welcome to mini. owner's manual. mini...

OWNER'S MANUAL.MINI COUNTRYMAN PLUG-IN HYBRID.

LINK:CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402628632 - VI/19

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL.MINI COUNTRYMAN PLUG IN HYBRID.

Thank you for choosing a MINI.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will haveon the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use theIntegrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important informationon vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical featuresavailable in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed toenhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute tomaintaining the value of your MINI.Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix ofthe printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

3Online Edition for Part no. 01402628632 - VI/19

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via theIntegrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

NOTESInformation.............................................................................................................................. 8

QUICK REFERENCEEntering.................................................................................................................................. 20

Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................25

On the road............................................................................................................................ 29

AT A GLANCECockpit.................................................................................................................................... 40

Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................44

Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 51

General settings................................................................................................................... 55

Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................67

MINI eDRIVE........................................................................................................................69

Safety of the hybrid system..............................................................................................72

CONTROLSOpening and closing........................................................................................................... 76

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel...............................................................................100

Transporting children safely..........................................................................................112

Driving..................................................................................................................................118

Displays................................................................................................................................ 140

Lights.................................................................................................................................... 163

Safety.....................................................................................................................................169

Driving stability control systems.................................................................................189

Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 193


Climate control...................................................................................................................213

Interior equipment............................................................................................................222

Storage compartments.....................................................................................................230

Cargo area............................................................................................................................233

DRIVING TIPSThings to remember when driving.............................................................................. 242

Saving fuel...........................................................................................................................247

MOBILITYCharging the vehicle........................................................................................................ 254

Refueling..............................................................................................................................263

Fuel........................................................................................................................................266

Wheels and tires................................................................................................................268

Engine compartment........................................................................................................285

Engine oil.............................................................................................................................288

Coolant..................................................................................................................................292

Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 294

Replacing components.................................................................................................... 296

Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 306

Care........................................................................................................................................313

REFERENCETechnical data.................................................................................................................... 320

Appendix..............................................................................................................................322

Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................324

© 2019 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.US English ID5 VI/19, 07 19 490Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.


6


NOTES

Information ................................................................................................... 8


Information

Using this Owner's Manual

OrientationThe fastest way to find information on aparticular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is pro-vided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineDue to updates after the editorial deadline,differences may exist between the printedOwner's Manual and the Integrated Owner'sManual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-pendix of the printed Owner's Manual forthe vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation,Entertainment, CommunicationThe Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-tainment, and Communication can be ob-tained as a printed book from the servicecenter.

The topics are also discussed in theIntegrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Additional sources of informa-tion

Service centerA service center will be glad to answerquestions at any time.

InternetVehicle information and general informa-tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-ble on the Internet: www.mini.jp.

Vehicle information and general informa-tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

Integrated Owner's Manual in thevehicleThe Integrated Owner's Manual specificallydescribes features and functions found inthe vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manualcan be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-ditional information, refer to page 67.

MINI Motorer’s Guide appThe app specifically describes features andfunctions found in the vehicle. The app canbe displayed on smartphones and tablets.

MINI Driver’s Guide WebDriver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-ble information for the selected vehicle. Ifpossible, only equipment and functions thatare actually installed in the vehicle will beexplained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-played in any current browser.

Seite 8

NOTES Information


Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Symbol Meaning

Precautions that must befollowed in order to avoid thepossibility of injury to yourselfand to others as well as seriousdamage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken tohelp protect the environment.

"..." Control Display texts used toselect individual functions.

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use withthe voice activation system..

››...‹‹ Responses generated by thevoice activation system.

Action stepsAction steps to be carried out are presentedas a numbered list. The steps must be car-ried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

EnumerationsEnumerations without mandatory order oralternative possibilities are presented as alist with bullet points.

– First possibility.

– Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components This symbol on a vehicle component

indicates that further information on thecomponent is available in the Owner'sManual.

The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicatethat incorrect use of high-voltage equip-ment or of orange-colored high-voltagecomponents results in the risk of life-threat-ening injury from electric shock.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all modelsand all standard, country-specific and op-tional equipment that is offered in themodel series. Therefore, this Owner'sManual also describes and illustrates fea-tures and functions that are not available ina vehicle, for example because of the se-lected optional features or the country-spe-cific version.

This also applies to safety-related functionsand systems.

When using these functions and systems,the applicable laws and regulations must beobserved.

For any options and equipment not descri-bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to theSupplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-swer any questions that you may haveabout the features and options applicable toyour vehicle.

Seite 9

Information NOTES


Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic informationThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues apolicy of constant development that is con-ceived to ensure that our vehicles continueto embody the highest quality and safetystandards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-tures described in this Owner's Manual maydiffer from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineDue to updates after the editorial deadline,differences may exist between the printedOwner's Manual and the Integrated Owner'sManual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-pendix of the printed Owner's Manual forthe vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

ManufacturerThe manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft,BMW AG.

Intended useHeed the following when using the vehicle:

– Owner's Manual.

– Information on the vehicle. Do not re-move stickers.

– Technical vehicle data.

– The traffic, speed, and safety laws wherethe vehicle is driven.

– Vehicle documents and statutory docu-ments.

WarrantyYour vehicle is technically configured forthe operating conditions and registrationrequirements applying in the country offirst delivery, also known as homologation.If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ-ent country it might be necessary to adaptyour vehicle to potentially differing operat-ing conditions and registration require-ments. If your vehicle does not comply withthe homologation requirements in a certaincountry you may not be able to lodge war-ranty claims for your vehicle there. Furtherinformation on warranty is available from aservice center.

Maintenance and repairsAdvanced technology, for instance the useof modern materials and high-performanceelectronics, requires suitable maintenanceand repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that you entrust corresponding pro-cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. Ifyou choose to use another service facility,the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends use of a facility that performs work,e.g., maintenance and repair, according toMINI specifications with properly trainedpersonnel, referred to in the Owner'sManual as "another qualified service centeror repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for in-stance maintenance and repair, there is arisk of subsequent damage and relatedsafety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehiclepaint can lead to a failure or malfunction ofcomponents, e.g., the radar sensors, andthereby result in a safety risk.

Parts and accessoriesThe manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends the use of parts and accessory prod-

Seite 10

NOTES Information


ucts approved by the manufacturer of theMINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and adviceon their use and installation are availablefrom a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested bythe manufacturer of the MINI for theirsafety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrantsgenuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does notevaluate whether each individual productfrom another manufacturer can be usedwith MINI vehicles without presenting asafety hazard, even if a country-specific of-ficial approval was issued. The manufac-turer of your vehicle does not evaluatewhether these products are suitable forMINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 WarningFor vehicles sold in California, the law re-quires vehicle manufacturers to provide thefollowing warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-tomobile components and parts, includingcomponents found in the interior furnish-ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-cals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects and repro-ductive harm. In addition, certain fluidscontained in vehicles and certain productsof component wear contain or emit chemi-cals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other re-productive harm. Battery posts, terminalsand related accessories contain lead andlead compounds. Batteries also containother chemicals known to the State of Cali-fornia to cause cancer. Wash your handsafter handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in labo-

ratory animals. Always protect your skinby washing thoroughly with soap and wa-ter. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-hicle.

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining apassenger vehicle or off-highway motorvehicle can expose you to chemicals in-cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known tothe State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-haust, do not idle the engine except asnecessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or washyour hands frequently when servicingyour vehicle. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-hicle.

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publica-tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered bythe following warranties:

– New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

– Federal Emissions System Defect War-ranty.

– Federal Emissions Performance War-ranty.

– California Emission Control System Lim-ited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warrantiesis listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation Booklet for US models or in the War-ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-dian models.

Seite 11

Information NOTES


Your vehicle has been specifically adaptedand designed to meet the particular operat-ing conditions and homologation require-ments in your country and continental re-gion in order to deliver the full drivingpleasure while the vehicle is operated underthose conditions. If you wish to operateyour vehicle in another country or region,you may be required to adapt your vehicleto meet different prevailing operating con-ditions and homologation requirements.You should also be aware of any applicablewarranty limitations or exclusions for suchcountry or region. In such case, please con-tact Customer Relations for further informa-tion.

MaintenanceMaintain the vehicle regularly to sustainthe road safety, operational reliability andthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenancemeasures:

– MINI Maintenance system.

– Service and Warranty Information Book-let for US models.

– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet forCanadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained according tothese specifications, this could result indamaging the vehicle. Such damage is notcovered by the MINI New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Data memory

General informationElectronic control devices are installed inthe vehicle. Electronic control units processdata they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Somecontrol units are necessary for the vehicle

to function safely or provide assistance dur-ing driving, for instance driver assistancesystems. Furthermore, control units facili-tate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged datacan be requested from the manufacturer ofthe vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam-ple.

Personal referenceEach vehicle is marked with a unique vehi-cle identification number. Depending on thecountry, the vehicle owner can be identifiedwith the vehicle identification number, li-cense plate and corresponding authorities.In addition, there are other options to trackdata collected in the vehicle to the driver orvehicle owner, for instance via utilizedservices.

Operating data in the vehicleControl units process data to operate the ve-hicle.

For example, this includes:

– Status messages for the vehicle and itsindividual components, e.g., wheel rota-tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,transverse acceleration, engaged safetybelt indicator.

– Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in thevehicle itself and generally volatile. Thedata is not stored beyond the operating pe-riod.

Electronic components, e.g. control unitsand ignition keys, contain components forstoring technical information. Informationabout the vehicle condition, component us-age, maintenance requirements events orfaults can be stored temporarily or perma-nently.

Seite 12

NOTES Information


This information generally records the stateof a component, a module, a system, or theenvironment, for instance:

– Operating states of system components,for instance, fill levels, tire inflationpressure, battery status.

– Malfunctions and faults in importantsystem components, for instance lightsand brakes.

– Responses by the vehicle to special sit-uations such as airbag deployment orengagement of the driving stability con-trol systems.

– Information on vehicle-damagingevents.

The data is required to perform the controlunit functions. Furthermore, it also servesto recognize and correct malfunctions, andhelps the vehicle manufacturer to optimizevehicle functions.

The majority of this data is volatile and isonly processed within the vehicle itself.Only a small share of data is stored in eventor fault memories based on an event.

When servicing, for instance during repairs,service processes, warranty cases, and qual-ity assurance measures, this technical infor-mation can be read out from the vehicle to-gether with the vehicle identificationnumber.

A dealer’s service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop can readout the information. The socket for OBD On-board Diagnosis required by law in the ve-hicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and usedby the relevant organizations in the servicenetwork. The data documents technical con-ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi-fication of the fault, compliance with war-ranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has productmonitoring duties to meet in line with prod-

uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, thevehicle manufacturer needs technical datafrom the vehicle. The data from the vehiclecan also be used to check customer claimsfor warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle canbe reset when a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer intothe vehicle

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, com-fort and individual settings can be stored inthe vehicle and modified or reset at anytime.

For example, this includes:

– Settings for the seat and steering wheelpositions.

– Suspension and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to theentertainment and communication systemof the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending onthe respective equipment:

– Multimedia data such as music, films orphotos for playback in an integratedmultimedia system.

– Address book data for use in conjunc-tion with an integrated hands-free sys-tem or an integrated navigation system.

– Entered navigation destinations.

– Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicleor is found on a device that has been con-nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,USB stick or MP3 player. If this data isstored in the vehicle, it can be deleted atany time.

Seite 13

Information NOTES


This data is only transmitted to third partiesupon personal request as part of the use ofonline services. The transmission dependson the selected settings for the use of theservices.

Incorporation of mobile devicesDepending on the vehicle equipment, mo-bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-stance smartphones, can be controlled viathe vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile de-vice can be played back and displayedthrough the multimedia system. Certain in-formation is transferred to the mobile de-vice at the same time. Depending on thetype of incorporation, this includes, for in-stance position data and other general vehi-cle information. This optimizes the way inwhich selected apps, for instance navigationor music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between themobile device and the vehicle, such as ac-tive access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further isdetermined by the provider of the particularapp being used. The extent of the possiblesettings depends on the respective app andthe operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General informationIf the vehicle has a wireless network con-nection, this enables data to be exchangedbetween the vehicle and other systems. Thewireless network connection is realized viaan in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unitor via personal mobile devices brought intothe vehicle, for instance smartphones. Thiswireless network connection enables 'onlinefunctions' to be used. These include onlineservices and apps supplied by the vehiclemanufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehiclemanufacturerWhere online services from the vehiclemanufacturer are concerned, the corre-sponding functions are described in the ap-propriate place, for instance the Owner'sManual or manufacturer's website. The rele-vant legal information pertaining to dataprotection is provided there too. Personaldata may be used to perform online serv-ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con-nection, for instance with the IT systems ofthe vehicle manufacturer intended for thispurpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of per-sonal data above and beyond that needed toprovide the services must always be basedon a legal permission, contractual arrange-ment or consent. It is also possible to acti-vate or deactivate the data connection as awhole. That is, with the exception of func-tions and services required by law such asAssist systems.

Services from other providersWhen using online services from other pro-viders, these services are the responsibilityof the relevant provider and subject to theirdata privacy conditions and terms of use.The vehicle manufacturer has no influenceon the content exchanged during this proc-ess. Information on the way in which per-sonal data is collected and used in relationto services from third parties, the scope ofsuch data, and its purpose, can be obtainedfrom the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDRis to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that

Seite 14

NOTES Information


will assist in understanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR is designed torecord data related to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-cord such data as:

– How various systems in your vehiclewere operating.

– Whether or not the driver and passen-ger safety belts were fastened.

– How far, if at all, the driver was depress-ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

– How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only ifa nontrivial crash situation occurs; no datais recorded by the EDR under normal driv-ing conditions and no personal data, for in-stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-tion, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the ve-hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, other parties,such as law enforcement, that have the spe-cial equipment, can read the information ifthey have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

The vehicle identification number can befound in the engine compartment, on theright-hand side of the vehicle.

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can alsobe found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customersThe following only applies to vehiclesowned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause in-jury or death, you should immediately in-form the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration NHTSA, in addition to noti-fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box

Seite 15

Information NOTES


1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, yourdealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety-related defect to Transport Canada,Defect Investigations and Recalls, may callthe toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. Youcan also obtain other information about mo-tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 16

NOTES Information


Seite 17

Information NOTES


18


QUICK REFERENCE

Entering ...................................................................................................... 20Set-up and use ........................................................................................... 25On the road ................................................................................................. 29


Entering

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: openthe tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehiclePress the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only thedriver's door or all vehicle access points areunlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, pressthe button on the vehicle key again to un-lock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the ve-hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof areopened, as long as the button on the vehiclekey is pressed.

Locking the vehiclePress the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central lockingsystem

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehi-cle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the ve-hicle.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle keyand hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Entering


Comfort Access

ConceptThe vehicle can be accessed without operat-ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., inyour pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-cle key when it is in close proximity or inthe car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's doorhandle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's doorhandle, press the button.

Opening and closing the tailgate withno-touch activation

Concept

The tailgate can be opened and closed withno-touch activation using the vehicle keyyou are carrying.

Performing the foot movement

1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicleat approx. one arm's length away fromthe rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-rection of travel and immediately pull itback.

Tailgate

Without automatic tailgate: unlocking

– Unlock the vehicle and then press thebutton on the outside of the tailgate.

– Press and hold the button on thevehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Seite 21

Entering QUICK REFERENCE


Depending on the setting, the doors mayalso be unlocked.

With automatic tailgate: Opening

– Unlock the vehicle and press the buttonon the tailgate.


Depending on the setting, the doors mayalso be unlocked.

Without automatic tailgate: ClosingClosing the tailgate manually.

With automatic tailgate: Closing

Press the button on the inside of the tail-gate.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steeringwheel

1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-nal

3 Instrument cluster

4 Wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument clusterThe indicator/warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily whenthe engine is started or the ignition isswitched on.

Seite 22



Driver's door

1 Safety switch

2 Power windows

3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever

2 Controller with buttons

3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

ConceptThe Central Information Display (CID) com-bines the functions of a multitude ofswitches. These functions can be operatedvia the Controller.

Controller

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The Controller can be used to se-lect menu items and enter the settings.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the mainmenu.

Press twice: open recently usedmenus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens destination input menufor navigation.

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Voice activation

Using the voice activation system

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol in the instrument clusterindicates that the voice activation system isactive.

Seite 23

Entering QUICK REFERENCE


If no other commands are available, operatethe function via the Central InformationDisplay (CID).

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steeringwheel or ›Cancel‹.

Help on the voice activation system

– To have information on the operatingprinciple of the voice activation systemread out loud: ›General information onvoice control‹.

– To have help for the current menu readout loud: ›Help‹.

Information on Emergency RequestsDo not use the voice activation system toinitiate an Emergency Request. In stressfulsituations, the voice and vocal pitch canchange. This can unnecessarily delay the es-tablishment of a phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button close to the in-terior mirror.

Seite 24



Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steeringwheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Electrically adjustable seats

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, andpush the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-itor

3 Folding in and out

Seite 25

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE


Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-red height and angle to suit your seatingposition.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Memory function

ConceptThe following settings can be stored and, ifnecessary, retrieved using the memoryfunction:

– Seat position.

– Exterior mirror position.

– Height of the Head-up Display.

Storing1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in thebutton lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on theseat while the LED is illuminated. TheLED goes out.

Calling up settingsThe stored position is called up automati-cally.

Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjust-ment switch or one of the memory buttonsis pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat po-sition on the driver's side is disabled after ashort while.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 Changing the waveband

2 Changing the entertainment source

3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Changing the station/track

5 Programmable memory buttons

Navigation destination entry

Entering a destination via address

State/province

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. "State/Province?"

4. Select the country from the list.

Seite 26

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use


Entering the address

The address can be entered in any order.

Example: entering the address via the town/city

1. "City/Postal code?"

2. Enter the town/city.

The list is narrowed down further witheach entry.

3. Select the symbol.

4. Select a town/city from the list.

5. If necessary, enter the street.

6. Select the street as you would the town/city.

7. If necessary, enter a house number.


9. Select a house number or range of housenumbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance"Start guidance"

If only the town/city was entered: destina-tion guidance is started to the town/citycenter.

Pairing the mobile phoneAfter the mobile phone is paired once withthe vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper-ated using the Central Information Display(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo-ken instructions.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-played on the Control Display.

5. Select the functions for which the mo-bile phone is to be used.

6. To perform additional steps on the mo-bile phone, refer to the mobile phoneowner's manual: e.g., search for or con-nect the Bluetooth device or a new de-vice.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-pears on the mobile phone display. Se-lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-trol number is displayed or the controlnumber must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-played on the Control Display withthe control number on the display ofthe device.

Confirm the control number on thedevice and on the Control Display.

– Enter and confirm the same controlnumber on the device and via theCentral Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayedin the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will ap-pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a callIncoming call can be accepted via the Cen-tral Information Display (CID) or the buttonon the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster

Use the OK button on the steering wheel toselect: "Accept"

Seite 27

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE


Dialing a number1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.


Establish the connection via the additionalphone:

1. Press the button.

2. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

ConceptCarPlay allows certain functions of a com-patible Apple iPhone to be used via Sirivoice operation and the Central InformationDisplay (CID).

Functional requirements– Compatible iPhone.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

– Corresponding mobile contract.

– Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera-tion are switched on on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

– "Bluetooth®"

– "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlayPair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle anddisplayed in the device list.

Seite 28

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use


On the road

Driving

Activate/deactivate drive-readystate

Ignition on/off

– On: press the Start/Stopbutton.

Most of the indicator/warning lights light up fora varied length of time.

– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.

All indicator lights go out.

– Radio-ready state: when the ignition isswitched off, press the ON/OFF buttonon the radio or when the engine is run-ning, press the Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power con-sumers remain ready for operation.

Activate/deactivate drive-ready state

Activating

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The drive-ready state is active: electric driv-ing is possible, or the engine can be started.

Deactivating

1. Engage selector lever position P withthe vehicle stopped.


3. Set the parking brake, if needed.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function helps savefuel. The system switches off the combus-tion engine when conditions for electricdriving have been met. The ignition re-mains switched on.

READY appears on the tachometer. If nec-essary, the combustion engine starts auto-matically.

Parking brake

SettingPull the switch.

The LED and indicator light light up.

ReleasingSteptronic transmission: press theswitch while the brake is pressed or

selector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positionsParking position P.

R is reverse.

Neutral N.

Drive mode D.

Engage selector lever position P or R onlywhen the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a drive mode or reverse, maintainpressure on the brake pedal until you areready to start.

Seite 29

On the road QUICK REFERENCE


Selector lever lockA lock prevents an inadvertent change fromselector lever position P to another selectorlever position and, depending on the trans-mission version, inadvertent switching toselector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal de-pressed, press the button on the front of theselector lever, see arrow.

Steptronic transmission, Sport andmanual mode

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left from se-lector lever position D.

Manual mode:

– To shift down: press the selector leverforward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-wards.

High beams, headlight flasher, turnsignal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the lowbeams are switched on.

– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-row 2.

Turn signal

– On: press the lever past the resistancepoint.

– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-ance point.

– Off: press the lever past the resistancepoint in the opposite direction.

– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tapthe lever up or down.

– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-sistance point and hold it there for aslong as you want the turn signal to flash.

Seite 30

QUICK REFERENCE On the road


Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– On: with the ignition switched off, pressthe lever either up or down past the re-sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-ance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired positionis reached.

– Resting position of the wipers: posi-tion 0.

– Rain sensor: position 1.

– Normal wiper speed: position 2.

– Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

– Switching off: press the lever down untilit reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down fromthe standard position.

Seite 31



Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from itsstandard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into thestandard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rainsensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-ance point.

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or taponce beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off


– To switch off fast wipe: press downtwice.

– To switch off normal wipe: press downonce.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

Seite 32



Rain sensor


Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rainsensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.


Pull the lever.

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Recirculated-air mode.

Controls the air flow,manual.

Controls the air distributionmanually.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Seite 33



Button Function

Recirculated-air mode.

Automatic recirculated-aircontrol AUC/recirculated-air mode.

Controls the air flow,manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs thewindows.

Windshield defroster.

Rear window defroster.

Refueling

Charging the vehicle

Charging socket flap

The charging socket flap is located on theleft side of the vehicle.

Always keep charging socket clean and un-obstructed.

Keep the charging socket flap closed whenthe charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cableTo connect, engage selector lever posi-tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, ifneeded.

1. To open the charging socket flap, presson the rear edge, arrow. The chargingsocket flap opens.

2. Remove the cover of the charging cableplug, if needed.

3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to thehousehold socket or Level 2 chargingcable to the port on the charging station.

4. Insert the appropriate charging cableplug, and push it in until it engages.

RemovingWhen the vehicle is locked, the chargingcable is locked. Unlock the vehicle beforeremoving the cable.

If necessary, clean the area between thecharging socket flap and charging socket,for instance from snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle keyif it is locked.

Charging cable is unlocked.

2. Press the release button on the handle,arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable atthe gripping areas.

Seite 34



Charging process is interrupted.

3. Remove the charging cable from thecharging socket, arrow 2.

4. Put the charging socket lid back on.

5. Press on the charging socket flap until itengages.

6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug,if needed.

7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable fromthe household socket or Level 2 charg-ing cable from the port on the chargingstation as applicable.

8. Stow the charging cable.

At a charging station, insert the perma-nently installed charging cable in theplace provided for it.

Refueling

Venting the tankExcess pressure may build up in the fueltank as a result of gasoline vapors; thispressure is dissipated before the fuel cap isopened.

The switch is located in the storage com-partment of the driver's door.

1. Switch off drive-ready state.

2. Pull the switch to start the pres-sure equalization.

The tank venting status is displayed inthe instrument cluster. In rare cases,tank venting can last several minutes.

When tank venting has finished, a mes-sage is displayed in the instrument clus-ter. The fuel filler flap is released foropening.

3. Open the fuel filler flap.

If it is not possible to open the fuel fillerflap after tank venting, press the buttonagain.

If it is still not possible to open the fuelfiller flap even after pressing the buttonagain, unlock the fuel filler flap man-ually.

Fuel cap1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the

rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flapopens.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-tached to the fuel filler flap.

GasolineFor the best fuel efficiency, the gasolineshould be sulfur-free or very low in sulfurcontent.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline withoutmetallic additives.

Information on the recommended fuel gradecan be found in the Owner's Manual.

Seite 35



Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure values can befound on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressureRegularly check the tire inflation pressureand correct it as needed:

– At least twice a month.

– Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflationpressureReinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Electronic oil measurement

RequirementsA current measured value is available afterapprox. 30 minutes of driving. During ashorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-ciently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil levelVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General informationSafely park the vehicle and switch off theignition and drive-ready state before addingengine oil.

Adding

Only add engine oil when the message isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.

Observe the quantity to be added in themessage.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-play.

Seite 36



Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside AssistanceThis service can be reached around theclock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-tance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, ifneeded. Select to dial the telephonenumber on a connected mobile phone.

Seite 37



38


AT A GLANCE

Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 40Central Information Display (CID) ...................................................... 44Voice activation system ......................................................................... 51General settings ....................................................................................... 55Owner's Manual media ........................................................................... 67MINI eDRIVE ............................................................................................ 69Safety of the hybrid system .................................................................. 72


Cockpit


This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered withthe series. It also describes features that arenot necessarily available in your vehicle, for

instance, due to the selected options orcountry versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When usingthese functions and systems, the applicablelaws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 95

2 Exterior mirror operation 109

3 Buttons of the central locking sys-tem 81

4 Lights

Front fog lights 166

Light switch 163

Lights off

Daytime running lights 165

Parking lights 163

Low beams 163

Seite 40

AT A GLANCE Cockpit


Automatic headlight con-trol 164

Cornering light 165

High-beam Assistant 165Instrument lighting 167

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise controlon/off 193

Cruise control on/off 200

Cruise control: to store thespeed

Pausing, continuing cruisecontrol

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control:reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control:increase distance

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 127

High beams, head-light flasher 127

High-beam Assistant 165

Canada: roadside parkinglight 164

Onboard Computer 153

7 Instrument cluster 140

8 Steering column stalk, right

Wipers 128

Wiper on Canadian mod-els 131Rain sensor 129

Rain sensor on Canadian mod-els 132Cleaning windows 129

Rear window wiper in Cana-dian models 130

Rear window wiper 130

Clean the rear window 130

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Voice activation 51

Telephone

Confirm the selection 153

Move selection up 153

Move selection down 153

Seite 41

Cockpit AT A GLANCE


Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Adjusting the steering wheel 111

12 Unlocking the hood 286

13 Operate the tailgate 86

14 Tank vent 263

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 306

Intelligent Safety 180

2 Control Display 44

3 Radio/Multimedia

4 Glove compartment 230

5 Climate control 213

6 PDC Park Distance Con-trol 202

Rearview camera 205

Parking assistant 208eDRIVE 122

Starting/stopping the engine,switching drive-ready statemodes and the ignition on/off 118

Seite 42

AT A GLANCE Cockpit


DSC Dynamic Stability Control 189

MINI Driving Modesswitch 191

7 Steptronic transmission selectorlever 136

8 Controller with buttons 46

9 Parking brake 125

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request,SOS 307

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas-senger airbag 172

3 Reading lights 167

4 Ambient light 167

5 Panoramic glass sunroof 97

6 Interior lights 167

Seite 43

Cockpit AT A GLANCE


Central Information Display (CID)


This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered withthe series. It also describes features that arenot necessarily available in your vehicle, forinstance, due to the selected options orcountry versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When usingthese functions and systems, the applicablelaws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com-bines the functions of a multitude ofswitches. These functions can be operatedvia the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-tems and communication devices whiledriving can distract from traffic. It is pos-sible to lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of accident. Only use the systems ordevices when the traffic situation allows.As warranted, stop and use the systemsand devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Letters and numbersDepending on the menu, you can switch be-tween entering upper and lower case let-ters, numbers and characters:

Symbol Function

or

Change between capital andlower-case letters.

Insert blank space.

Use voice activation.

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparisonWhen entering names and addresses, thechoice is narrowed down with every letterentered and letters may be added automati-cally.

Entries are continuously compared withdata stored in the vehicle.

– Only those letters are offered during en-try for which data is available.

– Destination search: place names can beentered in all languages that are availa-ble on the Control Display.

Activating/deactivating thefunctionsSeveral menu items are preceded by acheckbox. The checkbox indicates whetherthe function is activated or deactivated. Se-lecting the menu item activates or deacti-vates the function.

Seite 44

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)


Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Status information

General informationThe status field can be found in the upperarea of the Control Display. Status informa-tion is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being re-ceived.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net-work.

Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Other symbols

Symbol Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has beenswitched off.

Encrypted connection not ac-tive.

Request for the current vehicleposition.

Checking the current vehicle po-sition.

Split screen

General information

Additional information can be displayed onthe right side of the split screen, for in-stance information from the Onboard Com-puter.

In the divided screen view, the so-calledsplit screen, this information remains visi-ble even when switching to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off


2. "Split screen"

Seite 45

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE


Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus whichsupport the split screen function.

1. Move the Controller to the right untilthe split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. Select the desired setting.

Specifying the number of displays

It is possible to specify the number of dis-plays.

1. Move the Controller to the right untilthe split screen is selected.


3. "Personalize menu"


5. Move the Controller to the left.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control Display with touchscreen

2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General informationTo clean the Control Display, follow the careinstructions, refer to page 317.

In the case of very high temperatures onthe Control Display, for instance due to in-tense solar radiation, the brightness may bereduced down to complete deactivation.Once the temperature is reduced, for in-stance through shade or air conditioning,the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Con-trol Display can shift and damage the Con-trol Display. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Do not place objects in the areain front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automaticallyThe Control Display is switched on automat-ically after unlocking.

In certain situations, the Control Display isswitched off automatically, for instance ifno operation is performed on the vehicle forseveral minutes.

Switching on/off manuallyThe Control Display can also be switched offmanually.


2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on theController to switch it back on again.

Controller with navigation system

General informationThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The Controller can be used to se-lect menu items and enter the settings.

Seite 46



Operation– Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

– Press to select a menu item, for example.

– Tilt in four directions to switch betweendisplays, for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the mainmenu.

Press twice: open recently usedmenus.

Button Function

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Opens destination input menufor navigation.

Opens navigation map.

Opens the previous display.

Opens the Options menu.

Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menuPress the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-tions can be called up via the main menu.

Seite 47



Selecting menu itemsHighlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desiredmenu item is highlighted.


Changing between displaysAfter a menu item is selected, for instance"System settings", a new display appears.

– Move the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previ-ous display is shown.

– Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

– Move the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displayscan be opened.

Opening recently used menusThe recently used menus can be displayed.

Press the button twice.

Opening the Options menuPress the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas:

– Screen settings, for instance "Splitscreen".

– Control options for the selected mainmenu, for instance for "Media/Radio".

– If applicable, further operating optionsfor the selected menu, for instance "Savestation".

Changing settingsSettings, such as brightness, can be entered.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is displayed.


Entering letters and numbers

Input1. Turn the Controller: select letters or

numbers.

2. : confirm entry.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Press the Controller: deleteletters or number.

or

Hold the Controller down: de-lete all letters or numbers.

Seite 48



Using alphabetical listsFor alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-tries, the letters for which there is an entryare displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or rightquickly.

All letters for which there are entriesare displayed on the left edge.

2. Select the first letter of the desired en-try.

The first entry of the selected letter isdisplayed.

Operation via touchscreen

General informationThe Control Display is equipped with atouchscreen.

Touch the screen with your fingers. Do notuse any objects.

Opening the main menu Tap on the symbol.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu itemsTap the desired menu item.

Changing between displaysAfter a menu item is selected, a new displayopens.

An arrow indicates that additional displayscan be opened.

– Swipe to the left.

– Tap arrow.

The new display opens.

Opening recently used menus1. Tap on the symbol.

2. Tap on the symbol.

Changing settingsSettings such as brightness can be changedvia the touchscreen.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"



6. To perform the desired setting:

– Slide in the selected field to the rightor left, until the desired setting isdisplayed.

– , Tap on the symbol.

Seite 49



Entering letters and numbers

Input1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.

A keyboard appears in the Control Dis-play.

2. Enter letters and numbers.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Tapping the symbol: deletes theletter or number.

Tapping and holding the symbolall letters: deletes all letters ornumbers.

Operating navigation mapThe navigation map can be moved using thetouchscreen.

Function Operation

Enlarge/shrinkmap.

Drag in or out with thefingers.

Programmable memory but-tons

General informationThe Central Information Display (CID) func-tions can be stored on the programmablememory buttons and called up directly, forinstance radio stations, navigation destina-tions, phone numbers and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profilecurrently used.

Storing a function1. Select the function via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired but-ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing a functionPress the button.

The function will work immediately.This means, for instance that the number isdialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignmentTouch buttons with finger. Do not weargloves or use objects.

The button assignment is displayed at thetop edge of screen.

Deleting the button assignments1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously

for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Seite 50



Voice activation system



Concept

Most functions displayed on the ControlDisplay can be operated by voice commandsvia the voice activation system. The systemsupports you with announcements duringinput.

General information

– Functions that can only be used whenthe vehicle is stationary can only be op-erated via the voice activation system toa limited extent.

– The system uses a special microphoneon the driver's side.

– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver-bal instructions to use with the voice ac-tivation system.

Functional requirements

– A language must be set via the ControlDisplay that is supported by the voice

activation system. To set the language,refer to page 55.

– Always say commands in the languageof the voice activation system.

Using the voice activation sys-tem

Activating the voice activationsystem



3. Say the command.

This symbol in the instrument clusterindicates that the voice activation system isactive.

No other commands may be available. Inthis case, operate the function via the Cen-tral Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activationsystem

Press the button on the steeringwheel or ›Cancel‹.

Possible commands

General informationMost menu items on the Control Display canbe spoken as commands.

Commands from other menus can also bespoken.

Seite 51

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE


You can also select list entries such asphone list entries via voice activation. Readthese list entries out loud exactly as theyare shown in the respective list.

Displaying possible commandsThe following is displayed in the top area ofthe Control Display:

– Some possible commands for the currentmenu.

– Some possible commands from othermenus.

– Status of the voice recognition.

– Encrypted connection is not availa-ble.

Help on the voice activation system– To have information on the operating

principle of the voice activation systemread out loud: ›General information onvoice control‹.

– To have help for the current menu readout loud: ›Help‹.

Example: opening the tone set-tings

The commands of the menu items are spo-ken just as they are selected via the Con-troller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-put, if needed.


3. ›Media and radio‹

4. ›Tone‹

Adjusting

Setting the languageThe language to be used for voice activationand system announcements can be set.


1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired language.

Setting the voice dialogYou can set the system to use standard dia-log or a short version.

The short version of the voice dialog playsback short messages in abbreviated form.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Speech mode:"


Speaking during voice outputIt is possible to answer during inquiries ofthe voice activation system. The functioncan be deactivated if inquiries are often un-desirably interrupted, for instance due tobackground noise or talking.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Speaking during voice output"

Seite 52

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system


Activating voice recognition viathe serverThe voice recognition feature via the serverprovides a dictation function and a naturalmethod of entering destinations while im-proving the quality of voice recognition. Touse the functions, data is transmitted to aservice provider via an encrypted connec-tion and stored locally there.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Server speech recognition"

Adjusting the volumeTurn the volume button during the spokeninstructions until the desired volume is set.

– The volume remains constant even if thevolume of other audio sources ischanged.

– The volume is stored for the profile cur-rently used.

Information on EmergencyRequests

Do not use the voice activation system toinitiate an Emergency Request. In stressfulsituations, the voice and vocal pitch canchange. This can unnecessarily delay the es-tablishment of a phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer topage 307, close to the interior mirror.

System limits

– Certain noises can be detected and maylead to problems. Keep the doors, win-dows, and glass sunroof closed.

– Noises from the front passenger or therear seat bench can impair the system.Avoid making other noise in the vehiclewhile speaking.

– Major language dialects can cause prob-lems with the voice recognition feature.Speak loud and clear.

Using the voice activation sys-tem of the smartphone

A smartphone connected to the vehicle canbe used via voice activation.

Activate voice command response on thesmartphone for this purpose.

1. Press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.

Voice command response is activated onthe smartphone.

2. Release the button.

If activation is successful, a confirma-tion appears on the Control Display.

If it was not possible to activate voice com-mand response, the list of Bluetooth devicesappears on the Control Display.

Amazon Alexa Car Integration

ConceptAlexa is a digital assistant by Amazon. WithAmazon Alexa Car Integration, Alexa can beused in the vehicle.

Seite 53

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE


General informationSome of the Alexa functions are limited inthe vehicle to prevent any impairment ofsafety while driving.

Functional requirement– Amazon Alexa Car Integration pur-

chased via MINI Connected Store.

– The ConnectedDrive account in the ve-hicle is the same as in the MINI Con-nected app.

– The vehicle is connected in the MINIConnected app.

– Amazon account and MINI account areconnected in the MINI Connected app.

– Bluetooth connection or USB connectionbetween vehicle and mobile device isactive.

Activation in the MINI ConnectedappThe Amazon Alexa Car Integration is acti-vated in the MINI Connected app.

Follow the instructions in the app.

Activation in the vehicleAn authorization for the use of AmazonAlexa Car Integration is required every timebefore starting a trip.

1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integra-tion:

– Pair mobile device with the vehiclevia Bluetooth.

– Select driver profile, refer topage 89.



4. Say activation word ›Alexa‹ and desiredcommand.

Information about the active function isdisplayed on the Control Display.

MalfunctionIn case of a malfunction, switch off the ve-hicle and start the engine again.

Seite 54

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system


General settings



Language

Setting the languageVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"


The setting is stored for the driver profilecurrently used.

Setting the voice dialogFor voice dialog for the voice activation sys-tem, refer to page 52.

Time

Setting the time zoneVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Time zone:"



Setting the timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desiredhours are displayed.


7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-nutes are displayed.


Setting the time formatVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Time format:"



Seite 55

General settings AT A GLANCE


Date

Setting the dateVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Date:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired dayis displayed.


7. Make the settings for the month andyear.

Setting the date formatVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Date format:"



Setting the units of measure-ment

You can set the units of measurement forsome values, for example, consumption, dis-tances and temperature.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Units"

4. Select the desired menu item.



Activating/deactivating thedisplay of the current vehicleposition

ConceptIf vehicle tracking has been activated, thecurrent vehicle position can be displayed inthe MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivatingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Vehicle tracking"

4. "Vehicle tracking"


Activating/deactivatingpopup windows

For some functions, popup windows are dis-played automatically on the Control Display.Some of these popup windows can be acti-vated or deactivated.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Pop-ups"



Seite 56

AT A GLANCE General settings


Control Display

BrightnessVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"



6. Turn the Controller until the desiredbrightness is set.



Depending on the light conditions, thebrightness settings may not be clearly visi-ble.

ScreensaverIf no entries are made via the Central Infor-mation Display (CID), a screensaver can bedisplayed after an adjustable time.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Screensaver"



Messages

ConceptThe menu centrally displays all messages ar-riving in the vehicle in list form.

General informationThe following messages can be displayed:

– Traffic messages.

– Communication messages, for examplee-mails, SMS text messages or remind-ers.

– Check Control messages.

– Service requirements messages.

– Messages from the vehicle manufac-turer.

Messages are additionally displayed in thestatus field.

Retrieving messagesVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

The respective menu is opened, where themessage is displayed.

Deleting messagesAll messages, except Check Control mes-sages or messages from the vehicle manu-facturer, can be deleted from the list.

Check Control messages or messages fromthe vehicle manufacturer are displayed aslong as they are relevant.


1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

Seite 57




4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete allnotifications"

AdjustingThe following settings can be adjusted:

– Select the applications, from which mes-sages will be permitted.

– Sort the messages according to date orpriority.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Notifications"


Data protection

Data transfer

ConceptThe vehicle offers various functions whichrequire data to be transferred to MINI or aservice provider. The data transfer can bedeactivated for some functions.

General informationWith data transfer deactivated, the respec-tive function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivatingFollow the instructions on the Control Dis-play.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Data privacy"


Deleting personal data in thevehicle

ConceptDepending on the usage, the vehicle storespersonal data, such as stored radio stations.This personal data can be permanently de-leted via the Central Information Display(CID).

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, thefollowing data is deleted:

– Driver profile settings.

– Stored radio stations.

– Stored programmable memory buttons.

– Travel and Onboard Computer informa-tion.

– Music hard disk.

– Navigation, for instance stored destina-tions.

– Phone book.

– Office data, for instance voice notes.

– Login accounts.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can takeup to 15 minutes.

Functional requirementData can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting dataNote and follow the instructions on the Con-trol Display.


1. Switch on the ignition.

2. "My MINI"

Seite 58




4. "Data privacy"

5. "Delete personal data"

6. "Delete personal data"

7. "OK"

8. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes tocomplete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele-tion.

Canceling deletionStart the engine to cancel deletion of thedata.

Connections

ConceptVarious connection types are available forusing mobile devices in the vehicle. Theconnection type to select depends on themobile device and the desired function.

General informationThe following overview shows possiblefunctions and the suitable connection typesfor them. The scope of functions depends onthe mobile device.

Function Connec-tion type

Making calls via the hands-free system.

Using phone functions viathe Central Information Dis-play (CID).

Using the smartphone Of-fice functions.

Bluetooth.

Playing music from thesmartphone or the audioplayer.

Bluetoothor USB.

Using compatible apps viathe Central Information Dis-play (CID).

Bluetoothor USB.

USB storage device:

Exporting and importingdriver profiles.

Performing software up-dates.

Playing music.

USB.

Playing videos from thesmartphone or the USB stor-age device.

USB.

Using Apple CarPlay appsvia the Central InformationDisplay (CID) and voice op-eration.

Bluetoothand WiFi.

The following connection types require one-time pairing with the vehicle:

– Bluetooth.

– Apple CarPlay

Paired devices are automatically recognizedlater on and connected to the vehicle.

Seite 59



Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-tems and communication devices whiledriving can distract from traffic. It is pos-sible to lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of accident. Only use the systems ordevices when the traffic situation allows.As warranted, stop and use the systemsand devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General informationMalfunctions may occur with devices notlisted or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identificationnumber and software part numberWhen looking for compatible devices, youmay have to state the vehicle identificationnumber and the software part number.These numbers can be displayed in the ve-hicle.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth® info"

6. "System information"

A software update, refer to page 65, canbe performed, if needed.

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements– Compatible device, refer to page 60,

with Bluetooth interface.

– The vehicle key is in the vehicle.

– The device is ready for operation.

– Bluetooth is activated on the device andin the vehicle, refer to page 60.

– Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,may be required on the device; refer tothe owner's manual of the device.

Switching on BluetoothVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth®"

Activating/deactivating telephonefunctionsTo use all supported functions of a mobilephone, the following functions must be acti-vated prior to pairing.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the desired setting:

– "Office"

Activate function to transmit shortmessages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,notes, and reminders to the vehicle.Costs can be incurred by transmit-ting all data to the vehicle.

– "Contact images"

Activate function to show the con-tact pictures.


Seite 60



Pairing the mobile device with thevehicleVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the de-vice will be used:

– "Telephone"

– "Bluetooth® audio"

– "Apps"

– "Apple CarPlay"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-played on the Control Display.

6. On the mobile device, search for Blue-tooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-pears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi-cle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-trol number is displayed or the controlnumber must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-played on the Control Display withthe control number on the display ofthe device.

Confirm the control number on thedevice and on the Control Display.

– Enter and confirm the same controlnumber on the device and via theCentral Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayedin the device list.

If connection was not successful: Fre-quently Asked Questions, refer to page 61.

Frequently Asked QuestionsAll requirements are met and all requiredsteps were completed in the specified order.Despite that, the mobile device does notfunction as expected.

In this case, the following explanations canhelp:

Why could the mobile phone not be pairedor connected?

– There are too many Bluetooth devicesconnected to the mobile phone or vehi-cle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec-tions with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connectionsfrom the device list on the mobile phoneand start a new device search.

– The mobile phone is in power-save modeor has only a limited remaining batterylife.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer re-act?

– The applications on the mobile phone donot function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and onagain.

– Possibly too high or too low ambienttemperatures for mobile phone opera-tion.

Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-treme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used viathe Central Information Display (CID)?

– The mobile phone may not be properlyconfigured, for instance as Bluetooth au-dio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the tele-phone or additional phone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entriesdisplayed or why are they incomplete?

Seite 61



– Transmission of the phone book entriesis not yet complete.

– It is possible that only the phone bookentries of the mobile phone or the SIMcard are transmitted.

– It may not be possible to display phonebook entries with special characters.

– It may not be possible to transmit con-tacts from social networks.

– The number of phone book entries to bestored is too high.

– Data volume of the contact too large, forinstance due to stored information suchas notes.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

– A mobile phone is only connected as anaudio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and con-nect it with the telephone or additionalphone function.

How can the phone connection quality beimproved?

– The strength of the Bluetooth signal onthe mobile phone can be adjusted, de-pending on the mobile phone.

– Insert the mobile phone into the wire-less charging tray.

– Adjust the volume of the microphoneand loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checkedand the required function is still not availa-ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

USB connection

General informationMobile devices with a USB port are con-nected to the USB interface.

– Mobile phones.

– Audio devices with USB port, for in-stance MP3 players.

– USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported.FAT32 and exFAT are the recommendedformats.

A connected USB storage device will besupplied with charge current via the USBinterface if the device supports this. Followthe maximum charge current of the USB in-terface.

Vehicles: the following uses are possible onUSB interfaces with data transfer:

– Exporting and importing driver profiles,refer to page 89.

– Playing music files via USB audio.

– Playing videos via USB video.

– Loading of software updates, refer topage 65.

Follow the following when connecting:

– Do not use force when plugging the con-nector into the USB interface.

– Use a flexible adapter cable.

– Protect the USB storage device againstmechanical damage.

– Due to the large number of USB storagedevices available on the market, it can-not be guaranteed that every device isoperable on the vehicle.

– Do not expose USB storage devices toextreme environmental conditions, suchas very high temperatures; refer to theowner's manual of the device.

– Due to the many different compressiontechniques, proper playback of the me-dia stored on the USB storage devicecannot be guaranteed in all cases.

– To ensure proper transmission of thestored data, do not charge a USB storagedevice via the onboard socket, when itis connected to the USB interface.

Seite 62



– Depending on how the USB storage de-vice is being used, settings may be re-quired on the USB storage device, referto the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

– USB hard drives.

– USB hubs.

– USB memory card readers with multipleslots.

– HFS-formatted USB storage devices.

– Devices such as fans or lamps.

Functional requirementCompatible device, refer to page 60, withUSB interface.

Connecting the deviceConnect the USB storage device using asuitable adapter cable to a USB interface,refer to page 228.

The USB storage device is connected to thevehicle and displayed in the device list.

Apple CarPlay preparation

ConceptCarPlay allows certain functions of a com-patible Apple iPhone to be used via Sirivoice operation and the Central InformationDisplay (CID).

Functional requirements– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 60.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

– Corresponding mobile contract.

– Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera-tion are switched on on the iPhone.

– Booking the MINI Connected service:Apple CarPlay preparation.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

– "Bluetooth®"

– "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlayPairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer topage 61, via Bluetooth

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle anddisplayed in the device list, refer topage 64.

OperationFor more information, refer to theIntegrated Owner's Manual or the Owner'sManual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-munication.

Frequently Asked QuestionsAll requirements are met and all requiredsteps were completed in the specified order.Despite that, the mobile device does notfunction as expected.

In this case, the following explanations canhelp:

The iPhone has already been paired withApple CarPlay. When a new connection isestablished, CarPlay can no longer be se-lected.

– Delete the iPhone concerned from thedevice list.

Seite 63



– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-cerned from the list of stored vehiclesunder Bluetooth and under WiFi.

– Pair the iPhone as a new device.

If the steps listed have been carried out andthe required function is still not available:contact the hotline, a dealer's service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.

Managing mobile devices

General information– After one-time pairing, the devices are

automatically recognized and recon-nected when the ignition is switched on.

– The data stored on the SIM card or inthe mobile phone is transferred to thevehicle after recognition.

– For some devices, certain settings maybe necessary, for instance authorization,see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device listAll devices paired and/or connected withthe vehicle are displayed in the device list.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a de-vice is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Additional telephone"

"Bluetooth® audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the deviceFunctions can be activated or deactivatedfor paired and connected devices.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select the desired device.


If a function is assigned to a device, thefunction will be deactivated where appro-priate for a device that is already connectedand the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the deviceThe device's connection to the vehicle isdisconnected.

The device remains paired and can be con-nected again, refer to page 64.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the deviceA disconnected device can be reconnected.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the de-vice before disconnecting are assigned tothe device when it is reconnected. The func-

Seite 64



tions may be deactivated on a device al-ready connected.

Deleting the deviceVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removedfrom the device list.

Swapping the telephone and additionalphoneIf two mobile phones are connected to thevehicle, the functions of the phone and ad-ditional phone can be switched.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."

Software update

General informationThe vehicle supports a large number of mo-bile devices, for example mobile phones andMP3 players. Software updates are availablefor many of the supported devices. The ve-hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehiclesoftware updates.

Contact a dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop forinformation on available software updates.

Displaying the version of the installedsoftwareThe software version installed in the vehicleis displayed.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Software update"

4. "Show current version"

If an update has been carried out before, se-lect the desired version to display additionalinformation.

Updating software via USBThe software may only be updated when thevehicle is stationary.


1. Store the file for the software update inthe main directory of a USB flash drive.

2. Connect the USB data storage to a USBinterface.

3. "My MINI"



6. "Update software"

7. "USB"

8. "Install software"

9. "OK"

10. Wait for the update to complete.

11. Confirm system restart.

Restoring the software versionYou can restore the software to the versionprior to the last update or to its factory set-tings.

The software may only be restored whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Seite 65




1. "My MINI"



4. "Restore software"

5. – "Previous version"

The previous software version is re-stored.

– "Default software settings"

The first software version is re-stored.

6. "Remove software"

7. "OK"

8. Wait for restore.

9. Confirm system restart.

Seite 66



Owner's Manual media



General information

You can use the following media formats tocall up the content in the Owner's Manual:

– Printed Owner's Manual, refer topage 67.

– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-cle, refer to page 67.

Printed Owner's Manual

ConceptThe printed Owner's Manual describes allstandard, country-specific, and optional fea-tures offered with the series.

General informationThe Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-tainment, and Communication can be ob-tained as a printed book from the servicecenter.

Supplementary Owner's ManualsAlso follow the Supplementary Owner'sManuals, which are included in addition tothe onboard literature.

Integrated Owner's Manual inthe vehicle

ConceptThe Integrated Owner's Manual specificallydescribes features and functions found inthe vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manualcan be displayed on the Control Display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual


2. "My MINI"

3. "Owner's Manual"

4. Select the desired method of accessingthe contents.

Scrolling through the Owner'sManualTurn the Controller, until the next or previ-ous contents are displayed.

Context help

General informationThe section of the Owner's Manual relatingto the function that is currently selectedcan be displayed directly.

Seite 67

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE


Opening via Central InformationDisplay (CID)Change directly to the Options menu fromthe function on the Control Display:


2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Controlmessage is displayedDirectly from the Check Control message onthe Control Display:

"Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and theOwner's ManualTo switch from a function, for instanceradio, to the Owner's Manual on the ControlDisplay and to alternate between the twodisplays:


2. "Owner's Manual"

3. Select the desired page in the Owner'sManual.

4. Press the button again to return tothe last displayed function.

5. Press the button to return to thepage of the Owner's Manual displayedlast.

To alternate continuously between the lastdisplayed function and the last displayedpage of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4& 5. Opens a new display every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General informationThe Owner's Manual can be stored on theprogrammable memory buttons and calledup directly.

Storing1. Select the desired entry point via the

Central Information Display (CID):

– "Quick reference"

– "Search by pictures"

– "Keyword search"

– "Animations"

2. Press and hold the desired but-ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing

Press the button.

The Owner's Manual is displayedimmediately.

Seite 68

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media


MINI eDRIVE



Hybrid system

ConceptThis MINI is a hybrid vehicle. In addition tothe combustion engine, the vehicle featuresa high-voltage system that consists of anelectric motor and a high-voltage batteryamong other things.

The hybrid system can move the vehicle en-tirely on battery power. It can also supportthe combustion engine in certain situations.

General informationThe vehicle does not consume any fuelwhile driving purely electrically. This ena-bles environmentally friendly driving with-out emissions in certain conditions, for ex-ample, in city traffic. If the combustionengine is used, the hybrid system supportreduces fuel consumption even further.

In addition to this, the electric motor acts asan alternator: during braking and coasting,the electric motor converts the vehicle's ki-netic energy into electrical energy. Theelectrical energy is stored in the high-volt-age battery and is used to drive the electricmotor.

The vehicle can be charged, refer topage 254, via the charging socket at charg-ing stations or household sockets.

Overview

1 Combustion engine

2 Control-system electronics, electric mo-tor

3 Electric motor

4 High-voltage cables: orange

5 High-voltage battery

6 Charging socket

7 Vehicle battery

Functions while driving

Electric driving: ePOWERUnder certain conditions, refer to page 122,the vehicle is powered only by the electricmotor.

Variable drive typeThe combustion engine drives the front axleand the electric motor the rear axle. De-pending on the operating condition, the ve-hicle has the options of front-wheel drive,rear-wheel drive or combined for four-wheeldrive.

Seite 69

MINI eDRIVE AT A GLANCE


Follow the information about electric driv-ing ePOWER, driving with the combustionengine POWER, and the driving stabilitycontrol systems.

Assistance from the electric motorDriving off and accelerating require a lot ofenergy.

To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuelconsumption, the electric motor boosts thecombustion engine, refer to page 125. Todo this, the electric motor uses the energysaved in the high-voltage battery.

Driving with the combustion engine:POWERThe combustion engine, refer to page 124,provides the main drive power to move thevehicle. If required, the high-voltage batteryis charged at the same time.

The hybrid system always starts the com-bustion engine automatically.

Auto Start/Stop function, coastingThe Auto Start/Stop function, refer topage 121, switches the combustion engineoff while the vehicle is moving, when brak-ing, when rolling to a halt, and while the ve-hicle is stopped. The condition of rollingwith the combustion engine switched off isreferred to as coasting. Convenience func-tions such as the automatic climate controlare supplied by the high-voltage battery andcan remain switched on.

Energy recovery: CHARGEThe high-voltage battery of the hybrid sys-tem is charged through energy recoverywhile driving.

The electric motor acts as a generator andconverts the kinetic energy of the vehicleinto electrical energy, refer to page 125.

Charging the vehicleThe high-voltage battery of the vehicle canbe charged, refer to page 254, via thecharging socket at charging stations orhousehold sockets.

Regular and complete charging of the high-voltage battery reduces the fuel consump-tion by using electric energy.

Climate control while parking andchargingThe hybrid system makes it possible to op-erate the automatic climate control prior todriving off and with the combustion engineswitched off.

During vehicle charging or if the high-volt-age battery is sufficiently charged, the car'sinterior can be can be cooled or heated inadvance of the trip, refer to page 261.

The stationary climate control can also beswitched on directly.

DisplayThe displays of the hybrid system, refer topage 141, provide information about thecurrent state of hybrid operation.

Energy-saving drivingTo save energy while driving, read the fol-lowing descriptions:

– Saving fuel, refer to page 247.

– Using the hybrid system efficiently, re-fer to page 248.

– GREEN Mode.

– Adapting to the course of the road.

Safety of the hybrid systemFollow the information on safety, refer topage 72.

Seite 70

AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE


Long-term vehicle storageObserve the information on vehicle storageand for longer idle periods, refer topage 317.

Seite 71

MINI eDRIVE AT A GLANCE


Safety of the hybrid system



Working on the hybrid system

General informationThe manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that no changes be made to the vehi-cle, for instance the retrofitting of accesso-ries, that will have an effect on the vehicle’shybrid system.

Safety information

DANGER

Improperly performed work, in particularmaintenance and repair on the high-volt-age system, can lead to electric shock.There is a risk of injury, fire and danger tolife.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that the work on the vehicle, in par-ticular maintenance and repair, be per-formed by a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Contact with water

The hybrid system is typically safe even inthe following example situations:

– Water in the footwell, for instance aftera rainstorm when sunroof was keptopen.

– Vehicle is in water but only up to the al-lowed height.

– Fluid escapes in the cargo area.

Automatic deactivation

If an accident occurs, the hybrid system isswitched off automatically to prevent risk ofdanger to occupants and other road users.

Read the information on What to do afteran accident, refer to page 312.

Seite 72

AT A GLANCE Safety of the hybrid system


Seite 73

Safety of the hybrid system AT A GLANCE


74


CONTROLS

Opening and closing ................................................................................ 76Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ................................................... 100Transporting children safely .............................................................. 112Driving ...................................................................................................... 118Displays .................................................................................................... 140Lights ........................................................................................................ 163Safety ......................................................................................................... 169Driving stability control systems ..................................................... 189Driving comfort ...................................................................................... 193Climate control ....................................................................................... 213Interior equipment ................................................................................ 222Storage compartments ......................................................................... 230Cargo area ................................................................................................ 233


Opening and closing



Vehicle key

General informationThe vehicle is supplied with two vehiclekeys with integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-tery, refer to page 79.

Depending on the equipment and countryversion, various settings, refer to page 91,can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 89,for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance re-quirements, the service data is stored in thevehicle key, refer to page 294.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehiclekey, take the vehicle key with you when ex-iting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lockthe doors from the inside and lock them-selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannotbe opened from the outside. There is a risk

of injury. Take the vehicle key with you sothat the vehicle can be opened from theoutside.

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possiblewith special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in thevehicle while being exposed to extremetemperatures are at risk of injury or death.Do not lock the vehicle from the outsidewhen there are people in it.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-hicle can cause the vehicle to move andendanger themselves and traffic, for in-stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors orwindows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Donot leave children or animals unattendedin the vehicle. Take the vehicle key withyou when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Seite 76

CONTROLS Opening and closing


Overview

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: openthe tailgate

4 Panic mode

UnlockingPress the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer topage 91, the following access points areunlocked.

– Driver's door.

Press the button on the vehicle keyagain to unlock the other vehicle accesspoints.

– All doors and tailgate.

In addition, the following functions are exe-cuted:

– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig-nals and the horn. This function must beactivated in the settings, refer topage 91.

– The settings stored in the driver profile,refer to page 89, are applied.

– The driver's seat is set to the last posi-tion saved in the driver's profile. Thisfunction must be activated in the set-tings, refer to page 91.

– The interior lights, refer to page 167,and the MINI logo projection areswitched on, provided that the interiorlights were not switched off manually.

– Depending on the settings, the welcomelight and headlight courtesy delay fea-ture, refer to page 164, are switched on.

– Exterior mirrors folded through conven-ient closing are folded open.

– The alarm system, refer to page 93, isswitched off.

The light functions may depend on the am-bient brightness.

Convenient openingPress and hold the button on the ve-hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof areopened, as long as the button on the vehiclekey is pressed.

Locking1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehiclekey.

The following functions are executed:

– All doors and the tailgate are locked.

– Locking is confirmed by the turn signalsand the horn. This function must be ac-tivated in the settings, refer topage 91.

– The alarm system, refer to page 93, isswitched on.

If the drive-ready state is still switched onwhen you lock the vehicle, the vehicle hornhonks twice. In this case, the drive-readystate must be switched off by means of theStart/Stop button.

Seite 77

Opening and closing CONTROLS


With Comfort Access: convenientclosing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts canbe jammed. There is a risk of injury. Makesure that the area of movement of thedoors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the ve-hicle key in the area close to the ve-hicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof areclosed, as long as the button on the vehiclekey is pressed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Switch on interior lights andcourtesy light

Press the button on the vehicle keywith the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switchedon.

These functions are not available if the inte-rior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the am-bient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before press-ing the button again.

Tailgate

General informationTo avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-cle, do not place the remote control in thecargo area.

Depending on the equipment and countryversion, it is possible to specify whether thetailgate can be activated with the vehiclekey and how the vehicle doors will respondto this. To perform settings, refer topage 91.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operatingthe tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Makesure that the area of movement of the tail-gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when itopens. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Make sure that the area of movementof the tailgate is clear during opening andclosing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit thewindows and heat conductors while driv-ing. There is a risk of damage to property.Cover the edges and ensure that pointedobjects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the ve-hicle key for approx. 1 second.

Without automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swungupward.

With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

Seite 78




– Press the button on the vehiclekey and hold for at least 3 sec-onds.

– Briefly press the button on the vehiclekey three times in succession.


Replacing the battery1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 81.

2. Slide the integrated key into the open-ing and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover ofthe battery compartment and raise thecover.

4. Push battery in the direction of the ar-row using a pointed object and lift itout.

5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with thepositive side facing up.

6. Insert lid and cover.

7. Push the integrated key into the vehiclekey until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by adealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keysAdditional vehicle keys are available from aservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keysA lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-placed by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Malfunction

General informationA Check Control message is displayed.

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle maymalfunction under the following circum-stances:

Seite 79



– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-charged. For replacing the battery, referto page 79.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom transmission towers or otherequipment with high transmittingpower.

– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metalobjects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom mobile phones or other electronicdevices in direct proximity to the vehi-cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-gether with electronic devices.

– Interference of radio transmission by acharging process of mobile devices, forinstance charging of a mobile phone.

– The vehicle key is in direct proximity ofthe wireless charging tray.

Place the vehicle key in a different loca-tion.

In the case of interference, the vehicle canbe unlocked and locked from the outsidewith the integrated key, refer to page 80.

Switching on the drive-ready state viaemergency detection of the vehiclekey

It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the vehicle key has not beendetected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the markon the steering column as shown. Payattention to the display in the instru-ment cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected:

Switch on drive-ready state within10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightlychange the position of the vehicle key andrepeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked QuestionsWhat precautions can be taken to be able toopen a vehicle with an accidentally lockedin vehicle key?

– The options provided by the RemoteServices of the MINI Connected app in-clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-hicle.

This requires an active MINI Connectedcontract and the MINI Connected appmust be installed on a smartphone.

– Unlocking the vehicle can be requestedvia the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract isrequired.

Integrated key

General informationThe driver's door can be locked and un-locked without the vehicle key using theintegrated key.

Seite 80



Safety information

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possiblewith special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in thevehicle while being exposed to extremetemperatures are at risk of injury or death.Do not lock the vehicle from the outsidewhen there are people in it.

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined withthe door. The door handle can be moved.When pulling the door handle with theintegrated key inserted, paint or theintegrated key can be damaged. There is arisk of damage to property. Remove theintegrated key before pulling the outsidedoor handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out theintegrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the doorlock1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key intothe opening from below and remove thelid.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using theintegrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or lockedfrom the inside.

Alarm systemThe alarm system is not switched on if thevehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when thedoor is opened, if the vehicle has been un-locked via the door lock.

Buttons for the central lockingsystem

General informationIn the event of a severe accident, the vehi-cle is automatically unlocked. The hazardwarning system and interior lights come on.

Seite 81



Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

LockingPress the button with the frontdoors closed.

The vehicle is not secured against theftwhen locking.

UnlockingPress the button.

Opening

– Press button to unlock the doorstogether, and then pull the door handleabove the armrest.

– Front doors: pull the door handle on thedoor to open the door. The other doorsremain locked.

– Back doors: pull twice on the door han-dle on the door to be opened; the firsttime unlocks the door, the second timeopens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access

ConceptThe vehicle can be accessed without operat-ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., inyour pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-cle key when it is in close proximity or inthe car's interior.

General informationComfort Access supports the followingfunctions:

– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.

– Convenient closing.

– Open the tailgate.

– Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch activation.

This function must be activated in thesettings, refer to page 91.

Functional requirements– To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must

be outside of the vehicle near the doors.

– The next unlocking and locking cycle isnot possible until after approx. 2 sec-onds.

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outerdoor handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer topage 91, only the driver's door may be un-locked. Unlike when unlocking with the ve-hicle key, pressing the button on the outerdoor handle again does not unlock the other

Seite 82



vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle islocked again.

If the vehicle was locked automatically afterdriving off or with the button of the centrallocking system from the inside, note the fol-lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle isopened from the inside with the dooropener, pressing the button on the outerdoor handle will first lock the vehicle again.To unlock, the button on the outer door han-dle must be pressed again.

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outerdoor handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts canbe jammed. There is a risk of injury. Makesure that the area of movement of thedoors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driv-er's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows andglass sunroof will be closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

To open the tailgate

General informationIf the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargoarea.

Safety information

Warning


NOTICE


Seite 83



NOTICE


Opening

Press button next on tailgate.

Without automatic tailgate operation:


With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

Opening and closing the split doorswith no-touch activation

ConceptThe tailgate can be opened and closed withno-touch activation using the vehicle keyyou are carrying. Two sensors detect a for-ward-directed foot motion in the centralrear area and the tailgate is opened orclosed.

General informationTo avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargoarea.

If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, thetailgate may open or close inadvertently ifyou unintentionally move your foot or if afoot movement is detected.

The sensor has an approximate range of5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of thevehicle.

If the tailgate is opened with no-touch acti-vation, locked doors are not unlocked.

Contactless opening and closing of the tail-gate must be activated in the settings.

Safety information

Warning

During no-touch activation, vehicle partsmay be touched, such as the hot exhaustgas system. There is a risk of injury. Whenmoving your foot, make sure you have afirm stance and do not touch the vehicle.

Warning


NOTICE


Adjusting1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

Seite 84



4. "Tailgate"


– "Open by foot movement"

Contactless opening of the tailgate isswitched on or off.

– "Close by foot movement"

Contactless closing of the tailgate isswitched on or off.

Performing the foot movement1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle

at approx. one arm's length away fromthe rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-rection of travel and immediately pull itback. With this movement, the leg mustpass through the ranges of both sensors.

OpeningPerform the foot movement described ear-lier.

Before the opening, the hazard warning sys-tem flashes.

If touchless closing is switched on:

Moving a foot again will stop the openingprocess.

The subsequent foot movement will closethe tailgate again.

ClosingPerform the foot movement described ear-lier.

Before closing, the hazard warning systemflashes and an acoustic signal sounds.

Moving a foot again will stop the closingprocess.

When the touchless opening is switched on:the subsequent foot movement will openthe tailgate again.

MalfunctionVehicle key recognition by the vehicle maymalfunction under the following circum-stances:

– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-charged. For replacing the battery, referto page 79.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom transmission towers or otherequipment with high transmittingpower.

– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metalobjects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom mobile phones or other electronicdevices in direct proximity to the vehi-cle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-gether with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt thelocking request recognition function on thedoor handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock andlock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve-hicle key or use the integrated key, refer topage 80.

Seite 85



Tailgate

General informationTo avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-cle, do not place the remote control in thecargo area.

Depending on the equipment and countryversion, it is possible to specify whether thetailgate can be activated with the vehiclekey and how the vehicle doors will respondto this. To perform settings, refer topage 91.

Safety information

Warning


NOTICE


NOTICE


Without automatic tailgateoperation

Opening from the outside

– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press button next on tailgate.


Depending on the setting, the doors mayalso be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve-hicle key, refer to page 78.


Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull thebutton in the storage compartment of thedriver's door upwards.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull thebutton in the storage compartment of thedriver's door upwards twice in quick suc-cession.

Seite 86



Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of thetailgate can be used to conveniently pulldown the tailgate.

With automatic tailgate operation

Opening

Adjusting the opening height

You can set how far the tailgate shouldopen.

When adjusting the opening height, ensurethat there is a clearance of at least4 in/10 cm above the tailgate.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Tailgate"

5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desiredopening height.

From the outside

– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.


Depending on the setting, the doors mayalso be unlocked. Unlocking using thevehicle key, refer to page 78.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgateopens automatically to the adjusted openingheight.

From the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

Pull button in the storage compart-ment of the driver's door upward.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull thebutton in the storage compartment of thedriver's door upwards twice in quick suc-cession.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgateopens automatically to the adjusted openingheight.

Seite 87



Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in thefollowing situations:

– When the vehicle starts moving.

– By pressing the button on the outside ofthe tailgate. Pressing again closes thetailgate.

– By pressing the button on the inside ofthe tailgate. Pressing again closes thetailgate.

– By pressing the button on the vehiclekey. Pressing again continues the open-ing motion.

– By pressing or pulling the button in thestorage compartment of the driver'sdoor. Pulling again continues the open-ing motion.

Closing

From the outside

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

From the inside

Press and hold the button in the stor-age compartment of the driver's door.

The vehicle key must be located in the car’sinterior for this function.

An acoustic signal sounds before the tail-gate is closed.

From inside the tailgate

Without Comfort Access:

Press the button on the inside of the tail-gate.

With Comfort Access:

– Press button on the inside of the tail-gate, arrow 1.

– Press button, arrow 2.

The vehicle will be locked after closingthe tailgate. The driver's door must beclosed for this purpose and the vehiclekey must be outside of the vehicle in thearea of the tailgate.

Interruption of the closing procedure

The closing procedure is interrupted in thefollowing situations:

– If the vehicle starts off with a jerkymovement.

– By pressing the button on the outside ofthe tailgate. Pressing again closes thetailgate.

– By pressing the button on the inside ofthe tailgate. Pressing again closes thetailgate.

Seite 88



– By releasing the button in the storagecompartment of the driver's door. Press-ing again and holding continues theclosing motion.

Malfunction

Safety information

Warning

With manual operation of a blocked tail-gate, it can release itself unexpectedlyfrom the blockage. There is a risk of injuryor risk of damage to property. Do not oper-ate the tailgate manually if it is blocked.Have it checked by a dealer’s service cen-ter or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

Manual operation

Operate the unlocked tailgate manually witha slow and smooth motion.

To close the tailgate fully, press downlightly only. Closing occurs automatically.

Driver profiles

ConceptIn the driver profiles, individual settings forseveral drivers can be stored and called upagain when required.

General informationThere are three driver profiles with whichpersonal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-ery vehicle key has been assigned one ofthese driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehiclekey, the assigned personal driver profile willbe activated. All settings stored in thedriver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehiclekeys, the vehicle will apply the personal set-tings as it is being unlocked. These settingsare also restored, if the vehicle has beenused in the meantime by a person with adifferent vehicle key.

Changes to the settings are automaticallystored in the driver profile currently acti-vated.

If another driver profile is selected via theCentral Information Display (CID), the set-tings stored in it will be applied automati-cally. The new driver profile is assigned tothe vehicle key that is currently in use.

There is an additional guest profile availablethat is not assigned to any vehicle key: itcan be used to apply settings in the vehiclewithout changing the personal driver pro-files.

Functional requirementsFor the system to be able to identify thedriver profile associated to a particulardriver, the detected vehicle key must beclearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

– The driver is only carrying his or herown vehicle key.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle.

– The driver gets into the vehicle throughthe driver's door.

AdjustingThe settings for the following systems andfunctions are stored in the active profile.The scope of storable settings depends oncountry and equipment.

– Unlocking and locking.

– Lights.

– Radio.

– Instrument cluster.

– Programmable memory buttons.

Seite 89



– Volumes, tone.

– Control Display.

– Climate control.

– Navigation.

– PDC Park Distance Control.

– Rearview camera.

– Head-up Display.

– MINI Driving Modes.

– Intelligent Safety.

– Driver's seat position, exterior mirrorposition.

Both the positions saved via the seatmemory and the last position set aresaved.

Profile management

Selecting a driver profileRegardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif-ferent driver profile may be activated. Thisallows you to call up personal vehicle set-tings, even if you did not unlock the vehiclewith your own remote control.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

4. "OK"

– All settings stored in the selected driverprofile are automatically applied.

– The called-up driver profile is assignedto the vehicle key being used at thetime.

– If the driver profile is already assignedto a different vehicle key, this driverprofile will apply to both vehicle keys.

Using a guest profileThe guest profile is for individual settingsthat are stored in none of the three personaldriver profiles.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Drive off (guest)"

4. "OK"

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It isassigned to the vehicle key that is not usedat the time.

Renaming a driver profileA personal name can be assigned to the ac-tive driver profile to avoid confusion be-tween the driver profiles.


1. "My MINI"



The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be renamed.

4. "Change driver profile name"

5. Enter profile name.


Resetting a driver profileThe settings of the driver profile currentlyin use are reset to their factory settings.


1. "My MINI"



The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be reset.

Seite 90



4. "Reset driver profile"

5. "OK"

Exporting driver profilesMost settings of the active driver profilecan be exported.

Exporting is helpful when storing and re-trieving personal settings, for instance be-fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.The stored driver profiles can be taken intoanother vehicle.


1. "My MINI"



The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be exported.

4. "Export driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

Importing driver profilesProfiles stored on a USB storage device canbe imported via the USB interface.

The existing settings of the active driverprofile are overwritten with the settings ofthe imported driver profile.


1. "My MINI"


3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.

The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be overwritten.

4. "Import driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

5. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Displaying driver profiles during startThe driver profiles can be displayed at eachstartup to select the desired profile.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Show driver profiles at startup"

System limitsA clear assignment between the vehicle keyand driver may not be possible in the fol-lowing cases, for example.

– The passenger unlocks the vehicle withhis or her own vehicle key, but anotherperson is driving.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-fort Access and has multiple vehiclekeys with him or her.

– The driver changes, but the vehicle isnot locked and unlocked.

– Multiple vehicle keys are located out-side of the vehicle.

Adjusting

General informationDepending on the package and country ver-sion, various settings are available for thevehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver pro-file, refer to page 89, currently used.

Unlocking

DoorsVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"


Seite 91



– "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door is unlocked.Pressing again unlocks the entire ve-hicle.

– "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

TailgateVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4.

The text next to the symbol indicatesthe current setting.


– "Tailgate"

Depending on your vehicle's optionalfeatures, the tailgate is either un-locked or opened.

– "Tailgate and door(s)"

Depending on your vehicle's optionalfeatures, the tailgate is either un-locked or opened and the doors un-locked.

– "Tailgate opens after unlocking"

The vehicle must be unlocked beforethe tailgate can be used with the ve-hicle key.

– "Button lock"

It is not possible to use the tailgatevia the vehicle key.

Depending on the vehicle equipment andcountry version, this setting may not be of-fered.

Adjusting the last seat and mirrorpositionVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"



The setting can be made for thedriver profile marked with this symbol.

4. "Last seat position automatic"

When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver'sseat and exterior mirrors resume their lastset positions.

The most recent position is independent ofthe positions saved via the seat memory.

Automatic lockingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"


– "Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically aftera while if no door is opened after un-locking.

– "Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive off.

Automatic unlockingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off bypressing the Start/Stop button, the

Seite 92



locked vehicle is automatically un-locked.

Confirmation signals from thevehicleVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-firmation signals.

– "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,locking by one.

– With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk ofthe horn.

Alarm system

General informationWhen the vehicle is locked, the vehiclealarm system reacts to the followingchanges:

– Unauthorized opening of a door, thehood or the tailgate.

– Movements in the car's interior.

– Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance,during attempts at stealing a wheel orwhen towing the vehicle.

– Disconnected battery voltage.

– Improper use of the socket for OnboardDiagnosis.

– Locking the vehicle while a device isconnected to the socket for the OBD On-board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBDOnboard Diagnosis, refer to page 295.

The alarm system signals these changes vis-ually and acoustically:

– Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, theacoustic alarm may be suppressed.

– Visual alarm:

By flashing the exterior lighting.

Overview

Indicator light in the roof fin.

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/offWhen you unlock and lock the vehicle, ei-ther with the vehicle key or via Comfort Ac-cess, the alarm system is switched off andon at the same time.

Opening the doors with the alarmsystem switched onThe alarm system is triggered when a dooris opened if the door was unlocked usingthe integrated key in the door lock.

Seite 93



Switching off the alarm, refer to page 95.

Opening the tailgate with the alarmsystem switched onThe tailgate can be opened even when thealarm system is switched on.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked andmonitored again provided the doors arelocked. The hazard warning system flashesonce.


– Press the button on the vehiclekey and hold for at least 3 sec-onds.

– Briefly press the button on the vehiclekey three times in succession.


Signals of the indicator lights– The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

– Indicator light flashes for approx.10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarmsensor are not active, as doors, hood, ortailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-rectly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points areclosed, the interior motion sensor andtilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

– The indicator light goes out after un-locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

– The indicator light flashes after unlock-ing until the engine ignition is switched

on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi-nutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situationssuch as attempts to steal a wheel or whenthe vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensorThe windows and the glass sunroof must beclosed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General informationThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motionsensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-authorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

– In automatic vehicle washes.

– In duplex garages.

– During transport on trains carrying ve-hicles, at sea or on a trailer.

– With animals in the vehicle.

– When the vehicle is locked after start offueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-uations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle keywithin 10 seconds as soon as thevehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx.2 seconds and then continues to flash.

Seite 94



The tilt alarm sensor and interior motionsensor are switched off until the vehicle islocked again.

Switching off the alarm– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.

– Unlock the vehicle with the integratedremote control or switch on the ignitionusing the emergency detection of re-mote control, refer to page 79.

– With Comfort Access: if you have thevehicle key with you, unlock the vehicleusing the button on the driver's side orpassenger side door.

Power windows

General informationIf an accident of a certain severity occurs,the windows are automatically closed ex-cept a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body partsand objects can be jammed. There is a riskof injury or risk of damage to property.Make sure that the area of movement ofthe windows is clear during opening andclosing.

Overview

Power windows.

Safety switch.

Opening

– Press the switch to the resistancepoint.

The window opens while the switch isbeing held.

– Press the switch beyond the resist-ance point.

The window opens automatically. Press-ing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key,refer to page 77.

Closing

– Pull the switch to the resistancepoint.

The window closes while the switch isbeing held.

– Pull the switch beyond the resist-ance point.

The window closes automatically if thedoor is closed. Pulling the switch againstops the motion.

Seite 95



Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re-fer to page 78.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer topage 83.

Jam protection system

ConceptThe jam protection prevents objects or bodyparts becoming jammed between the doorframe and window while a window is beingclosed.

General informationIf resistance or a blockage is detected whilea window is being closed, the closing actionis interrupted.

The window opens slightly.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as an-tennas can impact jam protection. There isa risk of injury. Do not install accessoriesin the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protectionsystemIn case of danger from the outside or if icemight prevent normal closing, proceed asfollows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistancepoint and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam pro-tection. If the closing force exceeds aspecific threshold, closing is inter-rupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistancepoint again within approx. 4 secondsand hold it there.

The window closes without jam protec-tion.

Safety switch

General informationThe safety switch can be used to preventchildren, for instance from opening andclosing the rear windows using theswitches in the rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs,the safety function is switched off automati-cally.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED lights up if the safety func-tion is switched on.

Malfunction

General informationIn certain situations a window can only beoperated to a limited extent.

– After a power failure during the openingor closing process, the a window canonly be operated to a limited extent. Thesystem must be initialized in this case.

– The power window motors are equippedwith overheating protection. If a win-dow is opened and closed several timeswithin a short period of time, the over-heating protection switches the motoroff temporarily. Depending on the de-gree of overheating, it may only be pos-sible to close the window or it may notbe possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power windowmotor to cool down.

Seite 96



Initializing the systemThe system can be initialized when the ve-hicle is stationary and the engine is run-ning.

During initialization, the affected windowcloses without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body partsand objects can be jammed. There is a riskof injury or risk of damage to property.Make sure that the area of movement ofthe windows is clear during opening andclosing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistancepoint and hold.

The window closes.

3. Continue holding the switch pulledto the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once ortwice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-ing on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General informationIn the event of a severe accident, the glasssunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operatingthe glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that the area of movement ofthe glass sunroof is clear during openingand closing.

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroofPress back the switch up to orbeyond the resistance pointand release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyondthe resistance point and re-lease it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch againstops the motion.

Seite 97



With the glass sunroof completelyraised

– Slide switch back to the re-sistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof isopened as long as theswitch is pressed.

– Press the switch back beyond the resist-ance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo-tion.

Comfort positionIn some models, the wind noises in the car'sinterior are lowest when the glass sunroofis not fully open. In these models, the auto-matic function initially only opens the glasssunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glasssunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open– Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closedas long as the switch ispressed and stops in theraised position.

– Press the switch forward beyond the re-sistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops inthe raised position.


– Press the switch forward beyond the re-sistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.


With the glass sunroof completelyraised

Press the switch forward be-yond the resistance point andrelease it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

ConceptThe jam protection prevents objects or bodyparts from becoming jammed between theroof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-roof is closing.

General informationIf resistance or a blockage is detected whilethe glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-ing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protectionsystemIf there is an external danger, proceed asfollows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resist-ance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limitedjam protection. If the closing force ex-ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-terrupted.

2. Push the switch forward again past theresistance point and hold until the glass

Seite 98



sunroof closes without jam protection.Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a powerinterruptionAfter a power failure during the opening orclosing process, the glass sunroof can onlybe operated to a limited extent. The systemmust be initialized in this case. MINI rec-ommends having this work performed onlyby a dealer's service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

Seite 99



Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel



Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets theneeds of the occupants can make a vitalcontribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat-ing position plays an important role. Followthe information in the following chapters:

– Seats, refer to page 100.

– Safety belts, refer to page 104.

– Head restraints, refer to page 106.

– Airbags, refer to page 169.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat adjustments while driving can lead tounexpected movements of the seat. Vehi-cle control could be lost. There is a risk ofaccident. Only adjust the seat on the driv-er's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to therear, the efficacy of the safety belt can nolonger be ensured. There is a risk of slid-ing under the safety belt in an accident.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.Adjust the backrest so that it is in themost upright position as possible and donot adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when movingthe seats. There is a risk of injury or riskof damage to property. Make sure that thearea of movement of the seat is clear priorto any adjustment.

Manually adjustable seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Seite 100

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel


Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for-ward or back slightly making sure it en-gages properly.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often asneeded to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to thebackrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar supportThe curvature of the seat backrest can beadjusted in a way that it supports the lum-bar region of the spine. The lower back andthe spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-crease the curvature.

Electrically adjustable seats

General informationThe seat setting for the driver's seat isstored for the profile currently used. Whenthe vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key,the position is automatically retrieved if thefunction, refer to page 92, is activated forthis purpose.

The current seat position can be stored us-ing the memory function, refer to page 108.

Overview

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

Seite 101

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS


3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Forward/backward

Push switch forward or backward.

Height

Push switch up or down.

Seat tilt

Move switch up or down.

Backrest tilt

Move switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support

Concept

The curvature of the seat backrest can beadjusted in a way that it supports the lum-bar region of the spine. The lower back andthe spine are supported for upright posture.

Adjusting

– Press the front/rear sec-tion of the button:

The curvature is in-creased/decreased.

– Press the upper/lower sec-tion of the button:

The curvature is shiftedup/down.

Seite 102



Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-just the thigh support.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on

Press the button once for each tem-perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx.15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti-vated automatically with the temperatureselected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer topage 249, the heating output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button until theLEDs go out.

Rear seats

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when foldingdown the center armrest in the rear. Thereis a risk of injury. Make sure that the areaof movement of the center armrest is clearduring folding down.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seatbackrest while driving may occur due tounintentional unlocking of the rear seatbackrests by the straps. There is a risk ofinjury. Do not fasten any objects to thestraps for unlocking the rear backrests.

Backrest tilt

Pull the strap and apply your weight to thebackrest or lift it off, as necessary.

After the adjustment, move the backrestslightly forward or back to engage it cor-rectly.

Seite 103



Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safetybelt bucklesThe vehicle is fitted with five safety belts toensure occupant safety. However, they canonly offer protection when adjusted cor-rectly.

The two outer safety belt buckles of the rearseat are intended for the persons sitting onthe left and right.

The center safety belt buckle of the rearseat is intended for the person sitting in themiddle.

General informationAlways make sure that safety belts are be-ing worn by all occupants before driving off.Although airbags enhance safety by provid-ing added protection, they are not a substi-tute for safety belts.

If needed, disengage the safety belt in therear from the belt buckle on the side.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage pointwill be correct for adult seat occupants ofevery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a safety belt to buckle more thanone person will potentially defeat the abil-ity of the safety belt to serve its protectivefunction. There is a risk of injuries or dan-ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-son to wear a single safety belt. Infantsand children are not allowed on an occu-pant's lap, but must be transported and se-cured in designated child restraint sys-tems.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, includingsafety belts, can be limited or lost whensafety belts are fastened incorrectly. Anincorrectly fastened safety belt can causeadditional injuries, for instance in theevent of an accident or during braking andevasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju-ries or danger to life. Make sure that alloccupants are wearing safety belts cor-rectly.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, includingsafety belts, may not be fully functional orfail in the following situations:

– The safety belts or safety belt bucklesare damaged, soiled, or changed inany other way.

– Belt tensioners or belt retractorswere modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damagedin the event of an accident. There is a riskof injuries or danger to life. Do not modifysafety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors andkeep them clean. Have the safety beltschecked after an accident at the dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight

to your body over your lap and should-ers.

– Wear the safety belt deep on your hipsover your lap. The safety belt may notpress on your stomach.

Seite 104



– Do not rub the safety belt against sharpedges, or guide it or jam it in acrosshard or fragile objects.

– Avoid thick clothing.

– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-ward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt1. Guide the safety belt slowly over

shoulder and hip to put it on.

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safetybelt buckle. The safety belt buckle mustengage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up mechanism.

Middle safety belt in the rear

Buckling the safety belt

1. Pull the buckle tongues out of themounts in the roof.

2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in thebelt buckle, arrow 1.

3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in thebelt buckle, arrow 2.

Safety belt buckles must audibly clickinto place.

Unbuckling the safety belt1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to openthe second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.

4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in theroofliner.

Seite 105



Safety belt reminder for driver'sseat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and asignal sounds. Make sure that thesafety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be acti-vated if objects are placed on the front pas-senger seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re-moved or not correctly adjusted head re-straints can cause injuries in the head andneck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removedhead restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its centersupports the back of the head at asclose to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the headrestraint is as close as possible to theback of the head. Adjust the distancevia the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when movingthe head restraint. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that the area of movement isclear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce theprotective effect in the head and neckarea. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-ers.

– Do not hang objects, for instanceclothes hangers, directly on the headrestraint.

– Only use accessories that have beendetermined to be safe for attachmentto a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John CooperWorks sport seatThe height of the head restraints cannot beadjusted.

Adjusting the height



After setting the height, make sure that thehead restraint engages correctly.

Removing: John Cooper Workssport seatThe head restraints cannot be removed.

Seite 106



RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no onewill be sitting in the seat in question.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrestforward.

2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull thehead restraint out completely.

InstallingProceed in the reverse order to install thehead restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to re-moved or not correctly adjusted head re-straints can cause injuries in the head andneck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removedhead restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its centersupports the back of the head at asclose to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the headrestraint is as close as possible to theback of the head. Adjust the distancevia the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning


Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce theprotective effect in the head and neckarea. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-ers.

– Do not hang objects, for instanceclothes hangers, directly on the headrestraint.

– Only use accessories that have beendetermined to be safe for attachmentto a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height



After setting the height, make sure that thehead restraint engages correctly.

Seite 107



Fold down

– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,and press down the head restraint, ar-row 2.

– Forward: fold the head restraint towardthe front as far as it will go. Make surethat the head restraint engages cor-rectly.

RemovingThe head restraints cannot be removed.

Memory function

ConceptThe following settings can be stored and, ifnecessary, retrieved using the memoryfunction:

– Seat position.

– Exterior mirror position.

– Height of the Head-up Display.

General informationDifferent settings can be assigned to twomemory locations.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is notstored.

Safety information

Warning


Warning

Using the memory function while drivingcan lead to unexpected movements of theseat. Vehicle control could be lost. There isa risk of accident. Only retrieve the mem-ory function when the vehicle is station-ary.

Overview

Storing1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press the button. The LED in thebutton lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while theLED is lit. The LED goes out.

Calling up settingsThe stored position is called up automati-cally.

Seite 108



Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjust-ment switch or one of the memory buttonsis pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat po-sition on the driver's side is disabled after ashort while.

Call up deactivatedAfter a brief period, calling up stored seatpositions is deactivated to save batterypower.

To reactivate calling up of a seat position:

– Open or close the door or tailgate.

– Press a button on the vehicle key.

– Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General informationThe mirror on the front passenger side ismore curved than the driver's side mirror.

The mirror setting is stored for the driverprofile currently in use. When the vehicle isunlocked via the vehicle key, the position isautomatically retrieved if the function, referto page 92, is activated for this purpose.

The current exterior mirror position can bestored using the memory function, refer topage 108.

Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closerthan they appear. The distance to the traf-fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,for instance while changing lanes. There isa risk of accident. Estimate the distance to

the traffic behind by looking over yourshoulder.

Overview

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-itor

3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows thebutton movement.

MalfunctionIn case of an electrical malfunction, adjustthe mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-ror glass.

Seite 109



Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi-cle can be damaged in vehicle washes.There is a risk of damage to property. Be-fore washing, fold in the mirrors by handor with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful inthe following situations:

– In vehicle washes.

– On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded outautomatically at a speed of approx.25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are automaticallyheated as needed and when the ignition isswitched on.

Automatic dimming featureThe exterior mirror on the driver's side isautomatically dimmed. Photocells in thecar's interior mirror, refer to page 111, areused to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exteriormirror

ConceptIf reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glasson the front passenger side is tilted down-ward. This improves your view of the curband other formatting issue - low-lying ob-stacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver'sside mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

DeactivatingSlide the switch to the passenger's side mir-ror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interiormirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effectby the interior mirror.

Seite 110



Interior mirror, automatic dimmingfeature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

– In the mirror glass.

– On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements– Keep the photocells clean.

– Do not cover the area between the inte-rior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while drivingcan lead to unexpected steering wheelmovements. Vehicle control could be lost.There is a risk of accident. Adjustng thesteering wheel while the vehicle is sta-tionary only.

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-red height and angle to suit your seatingposition.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 111



Transporting children safely




The right place for children

Safety information

Warning








Always transport children in therear seat

General informationAccident research shows that the safestplace for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years ofage or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in therear seat in suitable child restraint systemsdesigned for the age, weight and size of the

child. Children 13 years of age or older mustwear a safety belt as soon as a suitable childrestraint system can no longer be used dueto their age, weight, or size.

Safety information

Warning

The safety belt cannot be fastened cor-rectly on children shorter than 5 ft,150 cm without suitable additional childrestraint systems. The efficacy of safetygear, including safety belts, can be limitedor lost when safety belts are fastened in-correctly. An incorrectly fastened safetybelt can cause additional injuries, for in-stance in the event of an accident or dur-ing braking and evasive maneuvers. Thereis a risk of injuries or danger to life. Se-cure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm us-ing suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passengerseat

General informationBefore using a child restraint system on thefront passenger seat, ensure that the front,knee, and side airbags on the front passen-ger side are deactivated. For automatic de-

Seite 112

CONTROLS Transporting children safely


activation of front-seat passenger airbags,refer to page 171.

Safety information

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-jure a child in a child restraint systemwhen the airbags are activated. There is arisk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated andthat the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-tor light lights up.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint systemis limited or compromised with incorrectseat adjustment or improper installation ofthe child seat. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Make sure that the child re-straint system fits securely against thebackrest. If possible, adjust the backresttilt for all affected backrests and correctlyadjust the seats. Make sure that seats andbackrests are securely engaged or locked.If possible, adjust the height of the headrestraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint sys-tems

General informationPay attention to the specifications of thechild restraint system manufacturer whenselecting, installing, and using child re-straint systems.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint sys-tems and their fastening systems whichhave been damaged or exposed to an acci-dent can be limited or lost. A child cannotbe properly restrained in the event of anaccident or braking and evasive maneu-vers. There is a risk of injuries or dangerto life.

Do not use child restraint systems whichhave been damaged or exposed to an acci-dent.

If a child restraint system and its fasten-ing system has been damaged or exposedto an accident, have these systemschecked and replaced by the dealer's serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Warning


Seite 113

Transporting children safely CONTROLS


On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-jure a child in a child restraint systemwhen the airbags are activated. There is arisk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated andthat the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-tor light lights up.

Before installing a child restraint system inthe front passenger seat, make sure that thefront, knee and side airbags on the frontpassenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbagsautomatically, refer to page 171.

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint system,move the front passenger seat as far back aspossible and adjust its height to the highestand thus best possible position for the beltand to offer optimal protection in the eventof an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt islocated in front of the belt guide of the childseat, move the front passenger seat care-fully forward until the best possible beltguide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passen-ger safety belt can be permanently locked tofasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system withthe safety belt.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in andpull it tight against the child restraintsystem. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-pletely.

In some cases it may be necessary to sepa-rate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts,refer to page 104.

LATCH child restraint fixingsystem

General informationLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-dren.

Pay attention to the operating and safety in-formation from the child restraint system

Seite 114



manufacturer when installing and usingLATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCHanchorsThe lower anchors may be used to attachthe CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com-bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kgwhen the child is restrained by the internalharnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-tive effect of the LATCH child restraintfixing system can be limited. There is arisk of injuries or danger to life. Make surethat the lower anchors are securely en-gaged and that the LATCH child restraintfixing system fits securely against thebackrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbolshows the mounts for thelower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with loweranchors are marked with apair, (2), of LATCH symbols.

For vehicles equipped witha middle seat:

It is not recommended touse the inner lower anchorsof standard outer LATCHpositions to fasten a childrestraint system on themiddle seat. Use the vehiclesafety belt instead for themiddle seat.

Before installing LATCH childrestraint fixing systemsPull the safety belt away from the area ofthe child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraintfixing systems1. Install child restraint system, see manu-

facturer's information.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors areproperly connected.

Seite 115



Child restraint systems with tetherstrap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectlyused for the child restraint system, theprotective effect can be reduced. There isa risk of injury. Make sure that the upperretaining strap does not run over sharpedges and is not twisted as it passes theupper anchor.

Warning

If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-tective effect of the child restraint systemis limited or there is none. In certain situa-tions, for instance braking maneuvers orin case of an accident, the rear backrestcan fold forward. There is a risk of injuriesor danger to life. Make sure that the rearbackrests are locked.

NOTICE

The anchors for the upper retaining strapsof child restraint systems are only pro-vided for these retaining straps. Whenother objects are mounted, the anchorscan be damaged. There is a risk of damageto property. Only mount child restraintsystems to the upper anchors.

Anchors

The respective symbol shows the an-chor for the upper retaining strap.Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found onthe rear seat backrest or the rear windowshelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe anchor1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.

2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-ing strap between or along both sides ofthe supports of the head restraint to theanchor.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap tothe anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling itdown.

Seite 116



Locking the doors and win-dows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out-side only.

Safety switch for the rearPress the button on the driver'sdoor if children are being trans-ported in the rear.

This locks various functions so that theycannot be operated from the rear: safetyswitch, refer to page 96.

Seite 117



Driving



Start/Stop button, drive-readystate

ConceptThe following ready states canbe attained by pressing theStart/Stop button:

– Radio-ready state on/off.

– Ignition on/off.

– Activate/deactivate drive-ready state.

To activate drive-ready state, you need topress the brake pedal at the same time.

The drive-ready state cannot be activated aslong as the charging cable, refer topage 256, is connected.

Switching radio-ready state on/offThe radio-ready state is activated by press-ing the Start/Stop button in the followingsituations:

– When the engine is running.

– When drive-ready state is activated.

– When the engine is switched off auto-matically using the Auto Start/Stopfunction.

Some electronic systems/power consumersremain ready for operation.

Radio-ready state is switched off automati-cally:

– If the driver's or front passenger door isopened when exiting the vehicle, withdrive-ready state switched off manually.

– If the ignition is switched off manuallywith the Start/Stop button.

– After approx. 8 minutes.

– When the vehicle is locked using thecentral locking system.

– Shortly before the battery is dischargedcompletely, so that the engine can stillbe started.

If the engine is switched off and the igni-tion is switched on, the system automati-cally switches to the radio-ready state if thelights are switched off or, if correspondinglyequipped, the daytime running lights areswitched on.

Ignition onPress the Start/Stop button, but do notpress on the brake pedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in theinstrument cluster light up for a variedlength of time.

To save battery power when the engine isoff, switch off the ignition and any unneces-sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition offPress the Start/Stop button again withoutstepping on the brake.

Seite 118

CONTROLS Driving


All indicator lights in the instrument clustergo out.

To save battery power when the engine isoff, switch off the ignition and any unneces-sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Safety measuresThe ignition is switched off automatically inthe following situations while the vehicle isstationary and the engine is off:

– When locking the vehicle, even if thelow beams are switched on.

– Shortly before the battery is dischargedcompletely, so that the engine can stillbe started. This function is only availa-ble when the low beams are switchedoff.

– When opening or closing the driverdoor, if the driver's safety belt is un-buckled and the low beams are switchedoff.

– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-led with driver's door open and lowbeams off.

– When the front doors are opened ifthere is no other person sitting in thefront seats.

The low beams switch to parking lights af-ter approx. 10 minutes of no use.

When the ignition is switched off automati-cally by opening or closing the driver's door,unbuckling the driver's safety belt or by theautomatic switching of the low beams toparking lights, the radio-ready state remainsactive.

Drive-ready stateWhen drive-ready state is activated, the ve-hicle is operational. Activated drive-readystate is the equivalent of a running enginein conventional vehicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is equivalent to switching theengine off.

Drive-ready state in detail

ConceptThe following are the different drive-readystate variants:

– Electric drive-ready state, refer topage 120.

The vehicle is powered by the electricmotor.

– Starting of combustion engine, refer topage 120.

The vehicle is powered by the combus-tion engine.

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gasescan enter into the vehicle. The exhaustgases contain pollutants which are color-less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-haust gases can also accumulate outside ofthe vehicle. There is danger to life. Keepthe exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficientventilation.

Warning

When driving in electric mode, pedes-trians and other traffic might pay less at-tention to the vehicle due to the lack ofengine noise. There is a risk of accident.Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.Watch traffic closely and actively inter-vene where appropriate.

Seite 119

Driving CONTROLS


Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to moveand possibly roll away. There is a risk ofaccident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-cured against rolling away, follow the fol-lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhillslope, turn the front wheels in the di-rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhillslope, also secure the vehicle, for in-stance with a wheel chock.

Warning








Activating drive-ready state1. Close the driver's door.



Depending on the prerequisite, the electricdrive-ready state is possible or the enginecan be started.

Electric drive-ready state

General informationThe vehicle is ready for driving withoutstarting the combustion engine.

Functional requirementElectric drive-ready state is possible, if theprerequisites for electric driving, refer topage 122, are fulfilled.

Display

READY indicates drive-readystate.

Combustion engine start

Functional requirementsThe combustion engine is started with acti-vation of the drive-ready state, refer topage 120, under the following conditions:

– The temperature of the hybrid system istoo high or too low.

– The high-voltage battery has an insuffi-cient charge.

Driving away1. Activate drive-ready state.

2. Engage selector lever position D, M/S orR.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Drive away.

Seite 120

CONTROLS Driving


Deactivating drive-ready stateAfter stopping the vehicle:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.


After parking the vehicle, you may hearnoises due to operation of the hybrid sys-tem, such as for cooling of the high-voltagebattery.

Safety measureThe drive-ready state is deactivated auto-matically after approx. 10 minutes when thevehicle is stationary if, with the selectorlever in position P or N, the driver's doorhas been opened and neither the brakepedal nor the accelerator pedal have beendepressed.

Before driving into a vehicle washSo that the vehicle can roll into a vehiclewash, follow instructions for going into anautomatic vehicle wash, refer to page 314.

Auto Start/Stop function

ConceptThe Auto Start/Stop function helps savefuel. The system switches off the combus-tion engine when conditions for electricdriving have been met. The ignition ordrive-ready state remains switched on.

General informationREADY is displayed in the instrument clus-ter. If necessary, the combustion enginestarts automatically.

The combustion engine is also stopped dur-ing the trip when rolling without accelera-tion or braking. This driving condition, inwhich the vehicle is traveling without

power and energy recovery is not active, isreferred to as coasting, refer to page 124.

The combustion engine is not switched offautomatically in the following situations:

– The combustion engine is not at operat-ing temperature.

– The transmission selector lever is in po-sition M/S.

– High-voltage battery is heavily dis-charged or vehicle electrical system isheavily burdened.

– High stress of the automatic climatecontrol in the heating or cooling phase.

– The hood is unlocked.

– The vehicle is being optimized for thecurrent driving style, for instance dur-ing the break-in period or after a serviceappointment.

– The hybrid system is malfunctioning.

Safety modeAn automatically stopped combustion en-gine does not start independently:

– When the driver's door is open and nei-ther the brake nor accelerator pedal aredepressed.

– When the hood is unlocked.

The indicator lights come on. The combus-tion engine can only be started via theStart/Stop button.

Switching off the vehicle during anautomatic engine stopDuring an automatic engine stop, the vehi-cle can be switched off permanently, for in-stance when leaving it.


– The ignition is switched off.

– The radio-ready state is activated.

Seite 121

Driving CONTROLS


– The Auto Start/Stop function is de-activated.

– Engage selector lever position P.


MalfunctionThe Auto Start/Stop function no longerswitches off the combustion engine auto-matically in the event of a malfunction. Amessage is displayed. It is possible to con-tinue driving. Have the system checked.

Electric driving: ePOWER

General informationIn ePOWER, the vehicle is driven by elec-tric power only. ePOWER works automati-cally.

Depending on the charge state of the high-voltage battery, maximum speed and rangeachieved can vary.

For electrical driving, certain conditions, re-fer to page 122, must be satisfied.

Displays of the hybrid system, refer topage 141.

Safety information

Warning

When driving in electric mode, pedes-trians and other traffic might pay less at-tention to the vehicle due to the lack ofengine noise. There is a risk of accident.Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.Watch traffic closely and actively inter-vene where appropriate.

Functional requirements– State of charge and temperature of the

high-voltage battery is sufficient.

– Selector lever position D or R engaged.

– The accelerator pedal is not depressedtoo far.

– The possible maximum speed for elec-tric driving is not exceeded.

– The driver's door is closed.

– MID or GREEN driving mode is selected.

eDRIVE button

General informationUsing the eDRIVE button, the characteris-tics of the hybrid system can be adjusted.

– MAX eDrive, refer to page 123

– Auto eDRIVE, refer to page 122

– SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 123

To switch between the individual functionmodes, press the eDRIVE button up ordown.

Overview

eDRIVE button

Auto eDRIVE

General informationAuto eDRIVE is activated by default whenthe vehicle is started via the Start/Stop but-ton.

In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hy-brid mode corresponding to the various

Seite 122

CONTROLS Driving


driving situations, i.e. the drive combinescombustion engine and electric motor. Therespectively most effective drive type ispreferred.

MAX eDRIVE

General information

The vehicle is driven exclu-sively by electric power.

If necessary, the maximum electrical speedthat applies to MAX eDRIVE may be delib-erately exceeded with the aid of kickdown,refer to page 138. The combustion engineis automatically started and the systemswitches to AUTO eDRIVE mode. Auto-matic starting of the engine while driving,refer to page 124.

Activating MAX eDRIVE

Press the button up repeatedly, un-til MAX eDRIVE is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

When pressing the button, the currenteDRIVE setting is graphically displayed onthe Control Display.

Specifying eMAX eDRIVE as thedefault modeMAX eDRIVE can be specified as the de-fault mode instead of AUTO eDRIVE.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Configure MAX eDRIVE"

4. "MAX eDRIVE by default"

Using the button:

1. Activate with the MAX eDRIVEbutton.

2. "Configure MAX eDRIVE"

3. "MAX eDRIVE by default"

The function is available, if the prerequi-sites for electric driving are fulfilled, referto page 122.

SAVE BATTERY

General information

The current charge state ofthe high-voltage battery canbe maintained or increasedwith SAVE BATTERY. Theelectric range can be con-served in this way for a later

point in the trip, for instance.

This charging process increases the averageconsumption.

The acceleration boost by the electric motormay be restricted.

The function is only available if sufficientfuel is available and in selector lever posi-tion D.

Activating SAVE BATTERY

Press the button down repeatedly,until SAVE with the battery symbolis displayed in the instrument clus-

ter.

When pressing the button, the currenteDRIVE setting is graphically displayed onthe Control Display.

Seite 123

Driving CONTROLS


Auto Start/Stop function, coasting

ConceptThe combustion engine is automaticallystopped and disengaged from the drivetrain.This driving condition of rolling is referredto as coasting.

Functional requirementsCoasting is possible:

– The high-voltage battery is sufficientlycharged.

– Transmission position D is engaged.

– The drive system is at operating temper-ature.

– GREEN Mode: when coasting, withoutoperating the brake, at speeds below100 mph, approx. 160 km/h.

After coasting, the combustion or electricmotor restarts depending on the operatingstate.

Acoustic pedestrian protection

ConceptDepending on the country-specific version,the system generates a continuous drivingnoise at standstill with the drive-ready stateactivated and during electric driving up toapprox. 20 mph/30 km/h.

A speaker system broadcasts the noise tothe surroundings.

As a result, other road users, for instancepedestrians or cyclists, can better perceivethe vehicle.

Driving with the combustionengine: POWER

ConceptThe combustion engine provides the maindrive power to move the vehicle. If re-quired, the high-voltage battery is chargedat the same time.


Automatic starting while drivingThe combustion engine is automaticallystarted under the following conditions whiledriving:

– When accelerating heavily or on uphillgrades.

– By pressing the accelerator pedal be-yond the resistance point at the fullthrottle position, kickdown.

– The high-voltage battery has an insuffi-cient charge.

– Selector lever position M/S is engaged.

– The speed for electric driving is ex-ceeded while accelerating.

– Adapting to the course of the road whendestination guidance is activated.

– System-related demand from the hybridcomponents.

Automatic switching off while drivingWhen reducing speed, the combustion en-gine is switched off when the conditions forelectric driving, refer to page 122, are met.

Seite 124

CONTROLS Driving


Assistance from the electricmotor

ConceptThe combustion engine provides the maindrive power to move the vehicle.

The electric motor provides assistance asneeded with additional propulsive power.

eASSISTDuring normal vehicle operation, the elec-tric motor assists the combustion engine,depending on the situation. This assistancereduces fuel consumption.

eBOOSTAccelerating quickly, such as when passing,requires the maximum available power fromthe electric motor. To do this, depress theaccelerator pedal firmly.

Energy recovery: CHARGE

ConceptThe hybrid system makes it possible to con-vert kinetic energy into electrical energyduring braking and coasting. This recoveredenergy charges the high-voltage battery. Ifnecessary, this stored electrical energy isoutput to the electric motor.

General informationDepending on the setting of the MINI Driv-ing Modes switch, the high-voltage batteryis charged at different speeds and the vehi-cle is decelerated differently while coasting.

Functional requirementsConditions such as the following must bemet to recover kinetic energy:

– The vehicle is moving.

– Selector lever position D, M/S is set.

– The high-voltage battery is not fullycharged.

Displays in the instrument clusterEnergy recovery displays in the instrumentcluster, refer to page 142.

Parking brake

ConceptThe parking brake is used to prevent the ve-hicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning






Warning



Seite 125

Driving CONTROLS







Overview

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. Theparking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, theparking brake is engaged automatically.

Steptronic transmission: in some parkingsituations, the parking brake is automati-cally engaged, when selector lever posi-tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park-ing brake is released automatically whenyou leave the selector lever position P.

While drivingTo use as emergency brake while driving:

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehiclebrakes hard while the switch is beingpulled.

The indicator light lights up red, asignal sounds and the brake lightslight up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a completestop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Steptronic transmission: press theswitch while the brake is pressed or se-lector lever position P is set.


The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars withSteptronic transmissionFor automatic release, step on the accelera-tor pedal.


The parking brake is automatically releasedwhen you step on the accelerator under thefollowing conditions:

– Engine on.

– Drive mode engaged.

– Driver buckled in and doors closed.

MalfunctionIf the parking brake fails or malfunctions,secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-iting.


Seite 126

CONTROLS Driving


Secure the vehicle against rolling away, forinstance with a wheel chock, after existingthe vehicle.

After a power failure

Re-activating the parking brake1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch while stepping onthe brake pedal or selector lever posi-tion P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake tobe reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as-sociated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrumentcluster goes out as soon as the park-ing brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams, head-light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its startingposition after actuation. To switch off man-ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistancepoint.

Triple turn signal activationLightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be ad-justed.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "One-touch turn signal"


Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Signaling brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point andhold it there for as long as you want theturn signal to flash.

MalfunctionUnusually rapid flashing of the indicatorlight indicates that a turn signal bulb hasfailed.

High beams, headlight flasherPush the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the lowbeams are switched on.

Seite 127

Driving CONTROLS


– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-row 2.

Wiper system

General informationDo not use the wipers if the windshield isdry, as this may damage the wiper blades orcause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the foldedaway state, body parts can be jammed ordamage may occur to parts of the vehicle.There is a risk of injury or risk of damageto property. Make sure that the vehicle isswitched off when the wipers are in thefolded away state and the wipers arefolded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,the wiper blades can be torn off and thewiper motor can overheat when switchingon. There is a risk of damage to property.Defrost the windshield prior to switchingthe wipers on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired positionis reached.

– Resting position of the wipers, posi-tion 0.

– Intermittent operation or rain sensor,position 1.

– Normal wiper speed, position 2.

– Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When travel is interrupted with the wipersystem switched on: when travel continues,the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe


– Switching off: press the lever down untilit reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down fromthe standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its in-itial position when released.

Seite 128

CONTROLS Driving


Interval mode or rain sensor

ConceptThe rain sensor automatically controls thetime between wipes depending on the in-tensity of the rainfall.

General informationThe sensor is located on the windshield, di-rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-out the rain sensor, the frequency of thewiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wiperscan accidentally start moving in vehiclewashes. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehiclewashes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standardposition, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation maynot start.

DeactivatingPress the lever back into the standard posi-tion.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity ofthe rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of therain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of therain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-dow at low temperatures and obstruct theview. There is a risk of accident. Only usethe washer systems, if the washer fluidcannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

Seite 129

Driving CONTROLS


NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,the wash pump cannot work as intended.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot use the washer system when thewasher fluid reservoir is empty.


Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on thewindshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzlesThe washer jets are automatically heatedwhenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching onTurn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-verse gear is engaged, the systemswitches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear windowTurn the outer switch in the desired direc-tion.

– In resting position: turn the switchdownward, arrow 3. The switch auto-matically returns to its idle positionwhen released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switchfurther, arrow 2. The switch automati-cally returns to its interval positionwhen released.

The function is deactivated if the washerfluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

ConceptThe fold-away position enables the wipersto be folded away from the windshield.

General informationHelpful when changing the wiper blades orunder frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning


Seite 130

CONTROLS Driving


NOTICE


Folding away the wipers1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-til the wipers stop in a close to verticalposition.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away fromthe windshield.

Folding down the wipersAfter the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto thewindshield.


3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers returnto their resting position and are readyagain for operation.

Canada: wiper system

General informationDo not use the wipers if the windshield isdry, as this may damage the wiper blades orcause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning


NOTICE


Seite 131

Driving CONTROLS


Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-ance point.

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or taponce beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initialposition when released.

Switching off and brief wipe


– To switch off from fast wiper speed:press down twice.

– To switch off from normal wiper speed:press down once.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initialposition when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

ConceptThe rain sensor automatically controls thetime between wipes depending on the in-tensity of the rainfall.

General informationThe sensor is located on the windshield, di-rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-out the rain sensor, the frequency of thewiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wiperscan accidentally start moving in vehiclewashes. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehiclewashes.


Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation maynot start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen-sor switched on: if the trip is resumedwithin approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensoris automatically activated again.

Seite 132

CONTROLS Driving


Setting the frequency or sensitivity ofthe rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of therain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of therain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-dow at low temperatures and obstruct theview. There is a risk of accident. Only usethe washer systems, if the washer fluidcannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,the wash pump cannot work as intended.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot use the washer system when thewasher fluid reservoir is empty.


Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on thewindshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzlesThe washer jets are automatically heatedwhenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching onTurn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-verse gear is engaged, the systemswitches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear windowTurn the outer switch in the desired direc-tion.

Seite 133

Driving CONTROLS


– In resting position: turn the switchdownward, arrow 3. The switch auto-matically returns to its idle positionwhen released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switchfurther, arrow 2. The switch automati-cally returns to its interval positionwhen released.

The function is deactivated if the washerfluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

ConceptThe fold-away position enables the wipersto be folded away from the windshield.

General informationHelpful when changing the wiper blades orunder frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning


NOTICE


Folding away the wipers1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press the wiper lever up past the pointof resistance and hold it for approx.3 seconds, until the wipers remain in anearly vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away fromthe windshield.

Folding down the wipersAfter the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto thewindshield.


3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers returnto their resting position and are readyagain for operation.

Seite 134

CONTROLS Driving


Washer fluid

General informationAll washer nozzles are supplied from onereservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshieldwasher concentrate. If desired, a windshieldwasher concentrate containing antifreezecan be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity:0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-ful substances and are flammable. There isa risk of fire and a risk of injury. Followthe instructions on the containers. Keepantifreeze away from ignition sources. Donot refill operating materials into differentbottles. Store operating materials out ofreach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and manyindividual states; do not exceed the allow-able washer fluid dilution ratio limits thatapply. Follow the usage instructions on thewasher fluid container.

Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-centrate or the equivalent is recom-mended.

Warning

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire oncontact with hot engine parts. There is arisk of injury or risk of damage to prop-erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-gine is cooled down. Next, fully close thelid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washerfluid for the water-repelling effect on thewindows can lead to damage to the wash-ing system. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Do not add silicon-containing ad-ditives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer con-centrates or antifreeze can damage thewashing system. There is a risk of damageto property. Do not mix different wind-shield washer concentrates or antifreeze.Follow the information and mixing ratiosprovided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment.

MalfunctionThe use of undiluted windshield washerconcentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze canlead to incorrect readings at temperaturesbelow +5 ℉/-15 ℃.

Seite 135

Driving CONTROLS


Steptronic transmission

ConceptThe Steptronic transmission combines thefunctions of an automatic transmission withthe possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

Warning






Selector lever version

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, atransmission with either a latching selectorlever or a tap-operated selector lever is in-stalled.

Transmission with a latching selectorlever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and Dare selected by moving the selector leverinto the respective selector lever position.The selector lever engages in the selectorlever positions.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode DSelector lever position for normal vehicleoperation. All gears for forward travel areactivated automatically.

R is reverseEngage selector lever position R only whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Neutral NThe vehicle may be pushed or roll withoutengine power in selector lever position N,for instance in vehicle washes, refer topage 137.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance forparking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels inselector lever position P.

Seite 136

CONTROLS Driving


Engage selector lever position P only whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure thatselector lever position P is set. Otherwise,the vehicle may begin to move.

Engaging selector lever positions:with a latching selector lever

General informationTo prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a drive mode, maintain pressureon the brake pedal until you are ready tostart.

Functional requirementsThe selector lever can only be taken out ofselector lever position P if the ignition is onor the engine is running.

Engaging selector lever position D, N,R, or PWith the vehicle stationary, depress thebrake pedal before shifting out of selectorlever position P or N; otherwise, the shiftblock will not be deactivated and the shiftcommand will not be executed.

A selector lever lock prevents the followingfaulty operation:

– Unintentional shifting into selectorlever position P or R.

– Unintentional shifting from selectorlever position P into another selectorlever position.

1. To release the selector lever lock: withthe brake pedal depressed, press thebutton on the front of the selector lever.

2. Move the selector lever into the desiredposition.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General informationIn some situations, the vehicle is to rollwithout its own power for a short distance,for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N:with a latching selector lever1. Switch on drive-ready state.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.


4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-gage selector lever position N.

5. Release brake.

Seite 137

Driving CONTROLS


The vehicle can roll.

If there is a malfunction, you may not beable to change the selector lever position.

Manually unlock the transmission lock, ifneeded, refer to page 139.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-ing performance. Step on the acceleratorpedal beyond the resistance point at the fullthrottle position.

Sport program M/S

ConceptThe shifting points and shifting times in theSport program are designed for a sportierdriving style. The transmission, for instanceshifts up later and the shifting times areshorter.

Activating the Sport program

Press the selector lever to the left from se-lector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-ment cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is ac-tivated.

eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto StartStop function are deactivated. Coasting to astandstill and braking phases are used moreoften to recover energy. Depending on thedriving situation, the high-voltage battery is

charged at different speeds. Fuel consump-tion can increase.

Ending the Sport programPush the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

ConceptManual gear-shifting is possible in manualmode.

Activating manual mode1. Press the selector lever to the left from

selector lever position D, arrow 1.

2. Push the selector lever forward or pull itbackward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and thegear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-ment cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting– To shift down: press the selector lever

forward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-wards.

The Steptronic transmission continuesshifting automatically in certain situations,for instance when certain engine speed lim-its are reached.

Seite 138

CONTROLS Driving


Ending the manual modePush the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe selector lever position isdisplayed, for example P.

Releasing the transmission lockmanually: with a latching selectorleverIf the selector lever is locked in selectorlever position P despite the ignition beingswitched on, the brake pedal being de-pressed and the button on the selector leverbeing pressed, the transmission lock can beunlocked manually:

Before unlocking the transmission lockmanually, set the parking brake to preventthe vehicle from rolling away.

1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to-gether with the lower retaining ring,from the center console. To do so, pullthe retaining ring upward at the rearedge.

2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec-tor, if needed.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboardvehicle tool kit, refer to page 296, press

the yellow release lever downward, seearrow.

4. Press the button on the front of the se-lector lever and move the selector leverback slightly.

Release the release lever.

5. Bring the selector lever into the desiredposition.

For additional information, see the chapteron tow-starting and towing.

Seite 139

Driving CONTROLS


Displays




Instrument cluster

Overview

1 Displays of the hybrid system 141

2 Indicator/warning lights

3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 148

5 Display/reset miles 148

6 Electronic displays 141

Seite 140

CONTROLS Displays


Electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 148

External temperature 148

Selection lists 153

Total miles/trip odometer 148

Onboard Computer 153

Charging screen 141

2 Selector lever position 136

3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-tus 191

eDRIVE mode status 122

Charging screen

1 Charging status 261

2 Timer, departure time 261

3 End of charging time 261

Departure time with timer 261

4 Stationary climate control 261

Displays of the hybrid system

Displays in the instrument cluster

General informationThe following functions of the hybrid sys-tem are displayed:

– High-voltage battery charge indicator,refer to page 142.

Seite 141

Displays CONTROLS


– Drive-ready state: READY, refer topage 142.

– Electric driving: ePOWER, refer topage 142.

– Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer topage 142.

– Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer topage 142.

– Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE, refer topage 143.

– SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 143.

The display depends on the system's operat-ing condition.

High-voltage battery charge indicatorThe Onboard Computer in the instrumentcluster can indicate the charge state of thehigh-voltage battery.

Drive-ready state: READY

READY indicates drive-readystate. For further information,see Drive-ready state in detail,refer to page 119.

Electric driving: ePOWER

In ePOWER mode, the range for electricdriving is colored yellow, arrow 1. Therange highlighted in yellow can vary de-pending on the driving situation andeDRIVE mode.

A pointer indicates the power outputted bythe hybrid drive in a scale, arrow 2.

If the pointer is outside the range high-lighted in yellow, the combustion engine isswitched on, arrow 3.

For further information, refer to Electricdriving: ePOWER.

Energy recovery: CHARGE

Energy recovery during coasting and brak-ing is indicated as CHARGE in the instru-ment cluster depending on the drivingmode, see arrow. The high-voltage battery ischarged. If the high-voltage battery is com-pletely charged, no energy can be recov-ered.

For further information, please refer to En-ergy recovery CHARGE, refer to page 125.

Acceleration boost: eBOOST

If the electric motor supports the combus-tion engine, for instance during rapid accel-eration, eBOOST, refer to page 125, is dis-played. Depending on the available charge

Seite 142

CONTROLS Displays


state of the high-voltage battery, therecould be more or less eBOOST available. Ifthe charge state of the high-voltage batteryis low, eBOOST may not be available.

Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE

The display becomes active af-ter MAX eDRIVE, refer topage 123, is activated via theeDRIVE button.

SAVE BATTERY

The display becomes active af-ter SAVE BATTERY, refer topage 123, is activated via theeDRIVE button.

The high-voltage energy available for elec-tric driving is conserved for a later point inthe trip.

Indications on the Control Display

Current vehicle state

General information

The following are displayed:

– Active components of the hybrid sys-tem:

Orange: energy flow of the combustionengine.

Yellow: energy flow of the hybrid sys-tem.

– Vehicle states:

– ePOWER.

– POWER.

– eBOOST.

– CHARGE.

– Coasting.

– Charging.

– System requirements of the hybrid sys-tem, for instance drive system not yetwarmed up to operating temperature.

– Driver request, for instance transmis-sion selector lever in the M/S position.

Displaying the energy flow


1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "eDRIVE"

Adapting to the course of the road

Concept

When the navigation system destinationguidance is active, hybrid operation adaptsto specific route sections.

The hybrid system is used to optimum ef-fect.

Situations which are already underway andsituations ahead are detected, indicated onthe Control Display, and the hybrid drive isadapted and prepared for them.

The function may be restricted if the navi-gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail-able, for example.


– Selector lever position D engaged.

– AUTO eDRIVE hybrid mode is activated.

Displaying the adaptation to the course ofthe road


1. "My MINI"


3. "eDRIVE"

The symbol on the Control Displayindicates that the function is active.

Seite 143

Displays CONTROLS


Display

Example: residential area or area with lowspeed limits. ePOWER electric driving isbeing prepared. When the residential areais reached, electric driving takes prece-dence.

Other situations are also shown on the Con-trol Display:

– Downhill gradients: the system is readyto charge the high-voltage battery.

– Target zone: ePOWER electric driving isbeing prepared.

– GREEN Mode:

Energy distribution: the electrical en-ergy is conserved for a later point.

Check Control

ConceptThe Check Control system monitors func-tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-functions in the monitored systems.

General informationA Check Control message is displayed as acombination of indicator or warning lightsand text messages in the instrument clusterand in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-put and a SMS text message may appear onthe Control Display.


General informationThe indicator/warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily whenthe engine is started or the ignition isswitched on.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illumi-nated: safety belt on the driver orpassenger side is not buckled. The

safety belt reminder can also be activated ifobjects are placed on the front passengerseat.

Make sure that the safety belts are posi-tioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensionermay not be working.

Have the vehicle checked immedi-ately by a dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, re-fer to page 126.

Brake system

Braking system impaired. Continueto drive moderately.

Have the vehicle checked immedi-ately by a dealer's service center oranother qualified service center orrepair shop.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Displays


Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advancewarning is issued, for example whenthere is the impending danger of a

collision or the distance to the vehicleahead is too small.

Increase the distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of theimminent danger of a collision when the ve-hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-tively high differential speed.

Intervene by braking or make an evasivemaneuver.

Person warning

If a collision with a detected personis imminent, the symbol lights upand a signal sounds.

Orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selecteddistance from the vehicle drivingahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer topage 193.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehiclehas been detected ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes: the condi-tions are not adequate for the system towork.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until the driver actively resumescontrol of the vehicle by pressing on thebrake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Anti-lock Braking System ABS

The Brake Assistant function maynot activate. Avoid abrupt braking.Take the longer braking distanceinto account.

Have the system immediatelychecked by a dealer's service center

or another qualified service center or repairshop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC con-trols the drive and braking forces.The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to thedriving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-functioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 189.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control isdeactivated or DTC Dynamic TractionControl is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti-vated.

DSC, refer to page 189, and DTC, re-fer to page 190.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The Flat Tire Monitor signals a lossof tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau-tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steeringmaneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 178.

Seite 145

Displays CONTROLS


Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light lights up: the TirePressure Monitor reports a low tireinflation pressure or a flat tire. Fol-

low the information in the Check Controlmessage.

The indicator light flashes and then contin-uously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tireinflation pressure can be detected.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-ces with the same radio frequency: afterleaving the area of the interference, thesystem automatically becomes activeagain.

– TPM was unable to complete the reset.Reset the system again.

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronicsis mounted: have it checked by a deal-er’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have the system checkedby a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 173.

Steering system

Steering system may not be working.

Have the system checked by a deal-er's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Emissions

– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.Have the vehicle checked as soonas possible.

– The warning light flashes under certaincircumstances:

This indicates that there is excessivemisfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have thesystem checked immediately; otherwise,serious engine misfiring within a briefperiod can seriously damage emissioncontrol components, in particular thecatalytic converter.

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer topage 295.

Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive

Acoustic pedestrian protection deac-tivated or possibly not working.

Have the system checked by a deal-er's service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-cator light indicates that a turn sig-

nal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 127.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights areswitched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlightcontrol, refer to page 163.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on.

Front fog lights, refer to page 166.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and offautomatically depending on the traf-

fic situation.

Seite 146

CONTROLS Displays


High-beam Assistant, refer to page 165.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It main-tains the speed that was set usingthe control elements on the steering

wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on.

High beams, refer to page 127.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous displaySome Check Control messages are displayedcontinuously and are not cleared until themalfunction is eliminated. If several mal-functions occur at once, the messages aredisplayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx.8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-played again automatically.

Temporary displaySome Check Control messages are hiddenautomatically after approx. 20 seconds. TheCheck Control messages are stored and canbe displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check ControlmessagesVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control messageis displayed or stored.

SMS text messagesSMS text messages in combination with asymbol in the instrument cluster explain aCheck Control message and the meaning ofthe indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messagesAdditional information, such as on thecause of an error or the required action, canbe called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text willbe automatically displayed on the ControlDisplay.

Depending on the Check Control message,further help can be selected.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the desired text message.


Seite 147

Displays CONTROLS


Messages after trip completionCertain messages displayed while drivingare displayed again after the ignition isswitched off.

Fuel gauge

The arrow beside the fuelpump symbol shows whichside of the vehicle the fuelfiller flap is on.

Vehicle tilt position may causethe display to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 264.

The yellow indicator light illumi-nates, once the fuel reserve isreached.

Odometer and trip odometer

ConceptThe total mileage driven and the mileagedriven since the last reset are displayed inthe instrument cluster.

Reset the trip odometerPress the button.

– The odometer is displayedwhen the ignition isswitched off.

– When the ignition isswitched on, the trip od-ometer is reset.

External temperature

General informationIf the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-nal sounds.


There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-stance on bridges or shady sections of theroad. There is a risk of accident. Modifyyour driving style to the weather condi-tions at low temperatures.

DisplayThe external temperature isdisplayed in the instrumentcluster.

Time

The time is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

The time can be set via theCentral Information Display(CID).

Seite 148

CONTROLS Displays


Date

The date is displayed in the in-strument cluster.

The date can be set via theCentral Information Display(CID).

Range

ConceptThe range indicates the distance that canstill be covered with the current fuel leveland the electric energy of the high-voltagebattery.

General informationThe range can be displayed as the range forelectric driving or as total range. The totalrange considers the contents of the fueltank as well as the electric energy in thehigh-voltage battery. If the requirements forelectric driving are not met, the total rangeconsiders the content of the fuel tank only.

Various factors, such as the automatic cli-mate control settings, are taken into ac-count when calculating the electric range.The electric range value is adapted dynami-cally.

The following factors are taken into accountwhen calculating the range:

– Automatic climate control settings.

– Driving style.

– Traffic conditions.

– Program changes via the MINI DrivingModes switch.

– Climate and terrain conditions.

When the remaining range is low:

– A Check Control message is displayedbriefly.

– The remaining range is shown on theOnboard Computer.

– With a dynamic driving style, for in-stance fast cornering, the engine func-tion is not always ensured.

The Check Control message is continuouslydisplayed below a certain range.

When the fuel level is low, MAX eDRIVE isautomatically selected to protect the com-bustion engine if the requirements for elec-tric driving are met. The Steptronic Sportprogram is not available.

You may continue driving with reduced per-formance and exclusively with electric mo-tor power.

Follow further instructions on refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than30 miles/50 km the engine may no longerhave sufficient fuel. Engine functions arenot ensured anymore. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Refuel promptly.

NOTICE

If the range is too small, the normal drivepower is not available. Engine functionsare not ensured. There is a risk of damageto property. Refuel as soon as possible.

Display, electric rangeIn MAX eDRIVE mode, theelectric range can be dis-played via the Onboard Com-puter in the instrument clus-ter.

Seite 149

Displays CONTROLS


The display indicates that thehigh-voltage battery is almostfully discharged or the electricdrive is currently not availa-ble.

Display total rangeThe current total range is dis-played in the instrument clus-ter.

Displaying the cruising rangeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Range"

Current consumption

ConceptThe current consumption of the combustionengine and of the electric motor can be dis-played.

Display, electric motorThe current electric consumption is dis-played on the Onboard Computer.

The current electric energyconsumption or generationcan be monitored.

Consumed energy: + sign

Generated energy: - sign

Displaying the currentconsumptionVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Current consumption"

Service requirements

ConceptThe function displays the service require-ments and the corresponding maintenancescopes.

General informationAfter the ignition is switched on the instru-ment cluster briefly displays available driv-ing distance or time to the next scheduledmaintenance.

A service advisor can read out the currentservice requirements from your vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on servicerequirementsMore information on the type of service re-quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-play.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Seite 150

CONTROLS Displays


Required maintenance procedures andlegally mandated inspections are dis-played.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor-mation.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re-quired.

The deadline for scheduledmaintenance or a legallymandated inspection is ap-proaching.

The service deadline has al-ready passed.

Entering appointment datesEnter the dates for the mandatory vehicleinspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and timeare set correctly.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "Vehicle inspection"

5. "Date:"


Automatic Service RequestData regarding the service status or legallymandated vehicle inspections is automati-cally transmitted to your dealer’s servicecenter before your vehicle is due for serv-ice.

You can check when your dealer’s servicecenter was notified.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"


4. "Teleservice Call"

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

ConceptSpeed Limit Info shows the current maxi-mum permitted speed in the instrumentcluster.

General informationThe camera at the base of the interior mir-ror detects traffic signs at the edge of theroad as well as variable overhead sign posts.Traffic signs with extra symbols for wetroad conditions, etc., are also detected andcompared with the vehicle's onboard data,such as from the rain sensor, and will bedisplayed depending on the situation.

With the navigation system, the systemtakes into account the information stored inthe navigation data and also displays speedlimits present on routes without signs.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing visibility and traffic situation.There is a risk of accident. Adjust drivingstyle to traffic conditions. Watch trafficclosely and actively intervene where ap-propriate.

Seite 151

Displays CONTROLS


Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interiormirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interiormirror clean and clear.

DisplaySpeed Limit Info is displayed via the On-board Computer.

Press button on the turn signal lever severaltimes, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed on the InfoDisplay in the instrument cluster.

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

With navigation system:Speed Limit Info is not availa-ble.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed inthe Head-up Display.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional andmay provide incorrect information in thefollowing situations:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-fall.

– When signs are fully or partially con-cealed by objects, stickers or paint.

– When driving very close to the vehiclein front of you.

– When driving toward bright lights orstrong reflections.

– When the windshield in front of the in-terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-ered by a sticker, etc.

– In the event of incorrect detection bythe camera.

– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-tion system are incorrect.

– In areas not covered by the navigationsystem.

– When roads differ from the navigation,such as due to changes in road routing.

– When passing buses or trucks with aspeed sticker.

– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

– When signs that are valid for a parallelroad are detected.

– During calibration of the camera imme-diately after vehicle delivery.

Seite 152

CONTROLS Displays


Selection lists

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, thebuttons on the steering wheel and the dis-play in the instrument cluster can be usedto display or use the following:

– Current audio source.

– Phone redial.

– Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting thesetting

Button on thesteering wheel

Function

Move selection up.

Move selectiondown.

Confirm the selec-tion.

Display

Onboard Computer

ConceptThe Onboard Computer displays differentvehicle data in the instrument cluster, suchas average values.

Calling up information on the InfoDisplay


Information is displayed in the Info Displayof the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Info Display

Repeatedly pressing the but-ton on the turn signal levercalls up the following informa-tion in the Info Display:

– Total range.

– Range, electric.

– Average consumption, fuel.

– Average consumption, electric.

– Current consumption, fuel.

– Current consumption, electric.

– Average speed.

– Charge state of the high-voltage battery.

– Date.

– Engine temperature display.

Seite 153

Displays CONTROLS


– With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation:

Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activatedin the navigation system.

– With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation:

Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activatedin the navigation system.

– Speed Limit Info.

– Vehicle speed.

The unit of some information can bechanged.

Setting units, refer to page 56.

Selecting informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, youcan select what information from the On-board Computer can be displayed on theInfo Display of the instrument cluster.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"




Information in detail

RangeDisplays the estimated cruising range avail-able with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driv-ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

High-voltage battery charge indicator

Concept

Indicates the current charge state of thehigh-voltage battery as a percentage.

Safety information

Warning

Even when it is indicated that the high-voltage battery is discharged, the high-voltage system is always still under highvoltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk ofinjury. Do not touch or change live parts,for instance orange high-voltage cables,even when the batteries are discharged.

Display

A marking is displayed when SAVE BAT-TERY is activated; see arrow. The markingindicates the high-voltage battery chargestate that is to be maintained or achievedby means of energy recovery.

Average consumptionThis is calculated for the period while theengine is running.

The average consumption is calculated forthe distance traveled since the last reset bythe Onboard Computer.

Seite 154

CONTROLS Displays


Average speedPeriods in which the vehicle is parked withthe engine manually stopped are not in-cluded in the calculation of the averagespeed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold the button on the turn signallever.

Engine temperature display

Concept

Displays the current engine temperature,based on a combination of coolant and en-gine oil temperature. As soon as the opti-mum operating temperature has been at-tained, the indicator is in the centerposition.

General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en-gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is toohigh, a red indicator light is dis-played.

When the engine oil temperature istoo high, a red indicator light is dis-played.

To check the coolant level, refer topage 292.

Display

With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation: distance todestinationThe distance remaining to the destination isdisplayed if a destination is entered in thenavigation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adoptedautomatically.

With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation: time of arrivalThe estimated time of arrival is displayed ifa destination is entered in the navigationsystem before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.

Speed Limit InfoSpeed Limit Info shows the current maxi-mum permitted speed in the instrumentcluster.

Onboard Computer on the ControlDisplay

ConceptThe Onboard Computer displays differentvehicle data on the Control Display, such asaverage values.

Seite 155

Displays CONTROLS


General informationTwo types of Onboard Computers are availa-ble on the Control Display:

– "Onboard info": average values, such asthe consumption, are displayed. The val-ues can be reset individually.

– "Trip computer": the values deliver anoverview of a specific route and can bereset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer ortrip computerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the Onboard ComputerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Onboard info"

4. "Consumption" or "Speed"

5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, ifneeded.

– "Reset": all values are reset.

– "Automatic reset": all values arereset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-cle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement

ConceptOn the Control Display, sport instrumentscan be displayed, and the vehicle state canbe checked before the use of the SPORTprogram.

Sport instruments

General informationOn the Control Display, values for powerand torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instrumentsVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Sport displays"

4. "Sports instruments"

Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Sports instruments"

Vehicle stateThe following vehicle and surrounding areadata is automatically checked and evaluatedin succession:

– Range.

– Engine temperature.

– External temperature.

– SPORT program state.

Finally, a total evaluation of the vehiclestate is displayed.

Seite 156

CONTROLS Displays


Checking vehicle stateVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Sport displays"

4. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Speed warning

ConceptA speed limit can be set that when reachedwill cause a warning to be issued.

General informationThe warning is repeated if the vehicle speedexceeds the set speed limit again, after ithas dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

AdjustingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Speed warning"

4. "Warning at:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desiredspeed is displayed.



1. "My MINI"


3. "Speed warning"

4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as thespeed warningVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Speed warning"

4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central in-strument cluster

ConceptThe LED ring displays light animations torepresent specific functions.

Basic displaysBasic functions, for instance the tachome-ter, can be set to be displayed continually ifso desired.

Event displaysFunctions that are only displayed tempora-rily, for instance the volume or temperaturesettings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions canalso be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-play corresponds with the displays of thefunction in the respective display.

Seite 157

Displays CONTROLS


Example: tachometerLike the tachometer in the instrument clus-ter, the light animations of the tachometer'sbasic display show the current RPMs andthe respective RPM warning thresholds.

Display

– Arrow 1: current RPM.

– Arrow 2: prewarning field.

– Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ringVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"


Adjusting the LED ringVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Basic display" or "Event display"


Setting the brightnessThe brightness can be adjusted when nightlighting is active in the instrument cluster.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"






Head-up Display

ConceptThis system projects important informationinto the driver's field of vision, for instancethe speed.

The driver can get information withoutaverting his or her eyes from the road.

General informationFollow the instructions for cleaning theHead-up Display. For additional informa-tion, see the chapter on care.

Safety information

Warning

When extending and retracting the projec-tion screen of the Head-up Display, bodyparts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-jury. Make sure that the area of movementof the projection screen is clear duringopening and closing.

Seite 158

CONTROLS Displays


NOTICE

The Head-up Display consists of sensitivecomponents that can easily be scraped ordamaged. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Do not place any objects on theHead-up Display, attach to system compo-nents or plug into the system. Do notmove the moving parts manually.

Overview

Switching the Head-up Displayon/offWhen switching on, the projection lens ofthe Head-up Display is extended. Whenswitching off, the projection lens of theHead-up Display is retracted again.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"


Display

OverviewThe following information is displayed onthe Head-up Display:

– Vehicle speed.

– Navigation instructions.

– Check Control messages.

– Selection list from the instrument clus-ter.

– Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayedbriefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-upDisplayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Displayed information"

6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display.


Setting the brightnessThe brightness is automatically adjusted tothe ambient brightness.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Brightness"



When the low beams are switched on, thebrightness of the Head-up Display can beadditionally influenced using the instru-ment lighting, refer to page 167.

Seite 159

Displays CONTROLS



Adjusting the heightVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Height"

6. Turn the Controller until the desiredheight is reached.



The height of the Head-up Display can alsobe stored using the memory function, referto page 108.

Setting the rotationThe screen of the Head-up Display can berotated around its own axis.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Rotation"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is selected.



Display visibilityThe visibility of the displays in the Head-upDisplay is influenced by the following fac-tors:

– Certain sitting positions.

– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-play.

– Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-ters.

– Wet roads.

– Unfavorable light conditions.

Country timer

ConceptThe system provides information on howlong and to what degree the vehicle wasdriven on inclined, uneven, unpaved orsnow-covered roads, for example.

General informationThe system consists of the following twomenus:

– Country Timer: display of the gradientand unevenness of the routes traveled.

– Country Timer Info: display of the besttime and total time since the last reset.

Follow the notes on traveling on poor roads,refer to page 246.

Opening the menuVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "MINI Country Timer"


– : display of the Country Timer.

– : display of the Country TimerInfo.

Seite 160

CONTROLS Displays


Display of the Country Timer

Overview

– Symbols for road gradient and uneven-ness, arrow 1.

– Category, arrow 2.

– Pulse value, arrow 3.

Symbols, pulse deflection and pulsevalueWhen the vehicle is being driven on in-clined or uneven roads, the correspondingsymbol lights up, arrow 1. One or morepulse deflections are displayed and thepulse value increases, arrow 3.

CategoriesAs the pulse value increases, the vehicle be-comes larger and reaches various levels, ar-row 2.

Display of the Country Timer Info

Best timeThe shortest driving time necessary toreach the highest level.

Total timeThe total driving time that the vehicle wasdriven at the highest level.

Resetting the Country Timer InfoVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "MINI Country Timer"

3. "MINI Country Timer Info"


– "Reset record time and display": re-setting the best time.

– "Reset total time": resetting the totaltime.

Vehicle status

General informationThe status can be displayed and actions per-formed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle statusVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance

Symbols Description

"Flat Tire Monitor": status ofthe Flat Tire Monitor, referto page 178.

"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-tus of the Tire PressureMonitor, refer to page 173.

"Engine oil level": Electronicengine oil level check, referto page 288.

Seite 161

Displays CONTROLS


Symbols Description

"Check Control": Check Con-trol messages are stored inthe background and can bedisplayed on the ControlDisplay. Displaying storedCheck Control messages, re-fer to page 147.

"Service required": display-ing service requirements,refer to page 150.

"Teleservice Call": Serv-ice Request.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Displays


Lights



Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next tothe steering wheel.

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Symbol Function

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams androadside parking lights

General informationPosition of switch: , ,

If the driver's door is opened when the igni-tion is switched off, the exterior lighting isautomatically switched off.

Parking lightsPosition of switch:

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extendedperiods; otherwise, the battery may becomedischarged and it would then be impossibleto start the engine.

Canada: when parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer topage 164.

Low beamsPosition of switch:

The low beams light up when the ignition isswitched on.

Seite 163

Lights CONTROLS


Canada: roadside parking light

ConceptThe vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, pressthe lever either up or down past the resist-ance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching offBriefly press the lever to the resistancepoint in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and headlightcourtesy delay feature

Welcome lights

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment andthe ambient brightness, individual lightfunctions may be switched on briefly whenthe vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivatingPosition of switch: ,


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"


5. "Welcome lights"


Headlight courtesy delay feature

General informationThe low beams stay illuminated for a partic-ular time if the high beams are switched onafter radio-ready state is switched off.

Canada: the low beams stay illuminated fora particular time if the headlight flasher isswitched on after radio-ready state isswitched off.

Setting the durationVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"


5. "Pathway lighting"

6. Set length of time.


Automatic headlight control

ConceptThe low beams are switched on and off au-tomatically depending on the ambientbrightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-light or if there is precipitation.

General informationA blue sky with the sun low on the horizoncan cause the lights to be switched on.

Seite 164

CONTROLS Lights


ActivatingPosition of switch:

The indicator light in the instrument clusteris illuminated when the low beams areswitched on.

System limitsThe automatic headlight control cannotserve as a substitute for your personal judg-ment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to de-tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa-tions, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General informationPosition of switch: , ,

The daytime running lights light up whenthe ignition is switched on. After the igni-tion is switched off, the parking lights lightup in position .

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries, daytime running lightsare mandatory, so it may not be possible todeactivate the daytime running lights.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"



Settings are stored for the currently usedvehicle key.

Cornering light

General informationPosition of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountain-ous roads or when turning, an additional,cornering light is switched on that lights upthe inside of the curve when the vehicle ismoving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automaticallyswitched on depending on the steering an-gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-nals.

When driving in reverse, the corneringlights may be automatically switched on re-gardless of the steering angle.

Adaptive headlight range con-trol

The adaptive headlight range control fea-ture balances out acceleration and brakingprocesses as well as the vehicle load condi-tions in order to avoid dazzling oncomingtraffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

High-beam Assistant

ConceptThe high-beam Assistant detects other traf-fic participants early on and automaticallyswitches the high beams on or off depend-ing on the traffic situation.

General informationThe high-beam Assistant ensures that thehigh beams are switched on, whenever thetraffic situation allows. In the low speedrange, the high beams are not switched onby the system.

Seite 165

Lights CONTROLS


The system responds to light from oncom-ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you,and to ambient lighting, for instance intowns and cities.

The high beams can be switched on and offmanually at any time.


Position of switch, depending on the vehicleequipment: ,


The indicator light in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the lowbeams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switchedbetween low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the sys-tem switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivatedwhen manually switching the high beamson and off, refer to page 127.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limitsThe high-beam Assistant cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver's personal judg-ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-uation that require this, therefore switch offmanually.

The system is not fully functional in the fol-lowing situations, and driver interventionmay be necessary:

– In very unfavorable weather conditions,such as fog or heavy precipitation.

– When detecting poorly-lit road userssuch as pedestrians, cyclists, horsebackriders and wagons; when driving closeto train or ship traffic; or at animalcrossings.

– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-scured oncoming traffic on highways.

– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in thepresence of highly reflective signs.

– When the windshield in front of the in-terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

ConceptThe front fog lights work alongside the lowbeams to illuminate a wider area of theroadway.

Functional requirementThe low beams must be switched on beforeswitching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The green indicator light lights up ifthe front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer topage 164, is activated, the low beams willcome on automatically when you switch onthe front fog lights.

Seite 166

CONTROLS Lights


When the high beams or headlight flasherare activated, the front fog lights are notswitched on.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirementThe parking lights or low beams must beswitched on to adjust the brightness.

AdjustingAdjust the brightness with thethumbwheel.

Interior lights

General informationDepending on the equipment, the interiorlights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour-tesy lights are controlled automatically.

The thumbwheel for the instrument lightingcontrols brightness of some of these fea-tures.

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lights

3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/offPress the button.

To switch off permanently: press the buttonand hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on andoff manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the frontnext to the interior light.

Ambient light

General informationDepending on the equipment version, light-ing can be adjusted for some lights in thecar's interior.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"

Seite 167

Lights CONTROLS


4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Ambient lighting"



Changing color

Push the switch forward or back:manual color change.

Press the switch forward or back-ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds,until the ambient light illuminates

several times: automatic color change. Pushthe switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightnessDepending on the equipment, the bright-ness of the ambient light can be adjustedvia the thumbwheel for the instrumentlighting or on the Control Display.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 168

CONTROLS Lights


Safety




Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver andthe front passenger by responding to frontalimpacts in which safety belts alone wouldnot provide adequate protection.

Side airbagIn the event of a side impact, the side air-bag protects the side of the body in thechest and lap area.

Seite 169

Safety CONTROLS


Head airbagIn the event of a side impact, the head air-bag protects the head.

Ejection MitigationThe head airbag system is designed as anejection mitigation countermeasure to re-duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicleoccupants through side windows duringrollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbagThe knee airbag protects the legs in theevent of a frontal impact.

Protective effectAirbags are not triggered in every impactsituation, for instance in less severe acci-dents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of theairbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the de-ployment area of the airbags is impaired,the airbag system cannot provide protec-tion as intended and may cause additionalinjuries due to triggering. There is a riskof injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-formation on achieving the optimum pro-tective effect of the airbag system.

– Keep a distance from the airbags.

– Always grasp the steering wheel on thesteering wheel rim. Hold your hands atthe 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, tokeep the risk of injury to your hands orarms as low as possible when the airbagis triggered.

– Make sure that the front passenger issitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and doesnot support them on the dashboard.

– Make sure that occupants keep theirheads away from the side airbag.

– There should be no additional persons,animals or objects between an airbagand a person.

– Dashboard and windshield on the frontpassenger side must stay clear - do notattach adhesive labels or coverings anddo not attach brackets or cables, for in-stance for GPS devices or mobilephones.

– Do not apply adhesive materials to theairbag cover panels, do not cover themor modify them in any way.

– Do not use the cover of the front airbagon the front passenger side as a storagearea.

– Do not attach slip covers, seat cushionsor other objects to the front passengerseat that are not specifically suited forseats with integrated side airbags.

– Do not place seat cushions or other ob-jects on the front seats that are not spe-cifically suited for seats with integratedside airbags.

– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such asjackets, over the backrests.

– Never modify either the individual com-ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-tem. This also applies to steering wheelcovers, the dashboard, and the seats.

– Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions veryclosely, injury from contact with the airbagscannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-tions.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporaryhearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-abilities may affect the air bag system; con-

Seite 170

CONTROLS Safety


tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-formation.

Warnings and information on the airbagsare also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbagsystem

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot aftertriggering of the airbag system. There is arisk of injury. Do not touch individualcomponents.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to fail-ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-ing of the airbag system. In the case of amalfunction, the airbag system might nottrigger as intended despite the accidentseverity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-ger to life. Have the airbag systemchecked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-ped by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on,the warning light in the instrumentcluster lights up briefly and thereby

indicates the operational readiness of theentire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning– Warning light does not come on when

the ignition is switched on.

– The warning light lights up continu-ously.

Automatic deactivation of thefront-seat passenger airbags

ConceptThe system reads if the front passenger seatis occupied by measuring the human body'sresistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the frontpassenger's side are activated or deacti-vated.

General informationBefore transporting a child on the front pas-senger seat, refer to the safety informationand instructions for children on the frontpassenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbagfunction, the system must be able to de-tect whether a person is sitting in thefront passenger seat. The entire seat cush-ion area must be used for this purpose.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Make sure that the front passenger keepshis or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children andadults, the front-seat passenger airbags maybe deactivated in certain sitting positions.In this case, the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position sothat the front-seat passenger airbags are ac-tivated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags,have the person sit in the rear.

Seite 171

Safety CONTROLS


To enable correct recognition of the occu-pied seat cushion.

– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball matsor other items to the front passengerseat unless they are specifically deter-mined to be safe for use on the frontpassenger seat.

– Do not place any electronic devices onthe front passenger seat if a child re-straint system is to be installed on it.

– Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

– No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seatpassenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passen-ger airbags indicates the operating state ofthe front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags areeither activated or deactivated.

– The indicator light lightsup when a child is properlyseated in a child restraintsystem or when the seat isempty. The airbags on thefront passenger side arenot activated.

– The indicator light does not light upwhen, for instance a correctly seatedperson of sufficient size is detected onthe seat. The airbags on the front pas-senger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systemsThe system generally detects childrenseated in a child restraint system, particu-larly in child restraint systems required byNHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-cle was manufactured. After installing achild restraint system, make sure that theindicator light for the front-seat passengerairbags lights up. This indicates that thechild restraint system has been detectedand the front-seat passenger airbags are notactivated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbagThe explosive power that activates driver's/front-seat passenger airbags very much de-pends on the positions of the driver's/frontpassenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this functionover the long-term, calibrate the front seatsas soon as a relevant Check Control mes-sage is displayed. A message also appearson the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning


An appropriate Check Control message isdisplayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way for-ward.

2. Move the respective seat forward again.The seat moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-tion.

Seite 172

CONTROLS Safety


The calibration procedure is completedwhen the Check Control message disap-pears.

If the message continues to be displayed,repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re-peat calibration, have the system checkedas soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

ConceptThe system monitors tire inflation pressurein the four mounted tires. The system warnsyou if there is a significant loss of pressurein one or more tires.

General informationSensors in the tire valves measure the tireinflation pressure and, depending on themodel, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on us-ing the system can also be found under Tireinflation pressure, refer to page 268.

Functional requirementsThe following conditions must be met forthe system; otherwise, reliable flagging of aloss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re-set was performed with the correct tireinflation pressure.

– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-justed to a new value, a reset was per-formed.

– Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current statusThe system status can be displayed on theControl Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-tem is active.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Tire conditions

General informationTire and system status are indicated by thecolor of the wheels and a SMS text messageon the Control Display.

All wheels greenSystem is active and will issue a warning re-lated to the tire inflation pressures storedduring the last reset.

One to four yellow wheelsA flat tire or major drop in the tire inflationpressure has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheelsIt may not be possible to identify tire infla-tion pressure losses.

Possible causes:

– Malfunction.

– The system is being reset.

Additional informationThe status control display additionallyshows the current tire inflation pressures.The values shown are instantaneous meas-urements and may vary depending on driv-ing style or weather conditions.

Seite 173

Safety CONTROLS


Resetting the systemVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using"Perform reset".

6. Drive away.

The wheels are displayed in gray and thefollowing is displayed "Resetting TirePressure Monitor…".

After a travel time of several minutes, theset tire inflation pressures are accepted asreference values. The resetting process iscompleted automatically while driving.

After successful completion of the reset, thetires appear in green on the Control Displayand "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See labelfor recommended pressures." is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time.When you continue the reset resumes auto-matically.

Messages

General informationA low tire inflation pressure may cause theDSC Dynamic Stability Control to beswitched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-dling, such as steering and braking re-sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limitedstability. There is a risk of accident. Do notcontinue driving if the vehicle is equippedwith normal tires. Follow the information

on run-flat tires and continued drivingwith these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check isrequired

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message ap-pears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected awheel change, but no reset wasdone.

No reset was performed for thesystem. The system issues awarning based on the tire infla-tion pressures stored during thelast reset.

Inflation was not carried out ac-cording to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure hasfallen below the level of the lastreset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct asneeded.

2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminatedin the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Controlmessage appears on the Control Display.

Seite 174

CONTROLS Safety



There is a tire inflation pressureloss.


Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moder-ately. Do not exceed a speed of80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gasstation, check and correct the tire infla-tion pressure in all four tires, if neces-sary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tireinflation pressure

Message


In addition, a symbol with the affected tireappears in a Check Control message on theControl Display.


There is a flat tire or a majorloss in tire inflation pressure.


Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withnormal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 274, are la-beled with a circular symbol containingthe letters RSC marked on the tire'ssidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-sure in all four tires, for instance usingthe tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all fourtires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-tor may not have been reset. In thiscase, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all fourtires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitormay not have been initialized. In thiscase, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage isnot possible, please contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tirekit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tirekit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.In this case, have the electronics checkedand replaced at the next opportunity.

Seite 175

Safety CONTROLS


Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

Your vehicle handles differently with arun-flat tire with no or low inflation pres-sure; for instance, your lane stability whenbraking is reduced, braking distances arelonger and the self-steering properties willchange. There is a risk of accident. Drivemoderately and do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damagedtire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in allfour tires at the next opportunity.


Possible driving range with adepressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible todrive safely varies depending on how thevehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, roadconditions, external temperature. The driv-ing range may be less but may also be moreif an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an averageweight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe todrive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire willhandle differently, potentially leading toconditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving offcourse.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abruptsteering maneuvers or driving over obsta-cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving canindicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces ofthe tire could come loose and cause an acci-dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

System limits

TemperatureThe tire inflation pressure depends on thetire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increasethe tire's temperature, thus increasing thetire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced whenthe tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warningwhen temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure lossThe system cannot indicate sudden serioustire damage caused by external circumstan-ces.

Seite 176

CONTROLS Safety


Failure performing a resetThe system does not function properly if areset has not been carried out, for instancea flat tire is reported though tire inflationpressures are correct.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning light flashes andis then illuminated continuously. ACheck Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pres-sure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the fol-lowing situations:

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronicsis mounted: have it checked by a deal-er’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have system checked by adealer’s service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

– The system was unable to complete thereset. Perform a system reset again.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-ces with the same radio frequency: afterleaving the area of the interference, thesystem automatically becomes activeagain.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure MonitoringSystemEach tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.) As an added safetyfeature, your vehicle has been equipped

with a tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-nates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-dling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale. Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-tor to indicate when the system is not oper-ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-cator is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a mal-function, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain contin-uously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehicle start-upsas long as the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-functions may occur for a variety of rea-sons, including the installation of replace-ment or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one ormore tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-sure that the replacement or alternate tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

Seite 177

Safety CONTROLS


Flat Tire Monitor FTM

ConceptThe system detects tire inflation pressureloss on the basis of rotation speed differen-ces between the individual wheels whiledriving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss,the diameter and therefore the rotationalspeed of the corresponding wheel changes.The difference will be detected and reportedas a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual in-flation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirementsThe following conditions must be met forthe system; otherwise, reliable flagging of aloss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini-tialization was performed with the cor-rect tire inflation pressure.

– After the tire pressure was adjusted to anew value, an initialization was per-formed.

Status displayThe current status of the flat tire monitorcan be displayed, for instance whether theRPA is active.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization requiredAn initialization must be performed in thefollowing situations:

– After the tire inflation pressure hasbeen adjusted.

– After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initializationWhen initializing, the set tire inflationpressures serve as reference values in orderto detect a flat tire. Initialization is startedby confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when drivingwith snow chains.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Performreset".

6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driv-ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continueswhen driving resumes.

Messages

General informationWhen a flat tire is indicated, DSC DynamicStability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-dling, such as steering and braking re-sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limitedstability. There is a risk of accident. Do notcontinue driving if the vehicle is equippedwith normal tires. Follow the information

Seite 178

CONTROLS Safety


on run-flat tires and continued drivingwith these tires.

Indication of a flat tire


In addition, a symbol with a Check Controlmessage appears on the Control Display.


There is a flat tire or a majorloss in tire inflation pressure.

Measure1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withnormal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 274, are la-beled with a circular symbol containingthe letters RSC marked on the tire'ssidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-sure in all four tires, for instance usingthe tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.



If identification of flat tire damage isnot possible, please contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tirekit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tirekit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.In this case, have the electronics checkedand replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning


Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damagedtire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in allfour tires at the next opportunity.


Seite 179

Safety CONTROLS


Possible driving range with adepressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible todrive safely varies depending on how thevehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, roadconditions, external temperature. The driv-ing range may be less but may also be moreif an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an averageweight and used under favorable conditions,the distance for which it may be safe todrive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire willhandle differently, potentially leading toconditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving offcourse.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abruptsteering maneuvers or driving over obsta-cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving canindicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces ofthe tire could come loose and cause an acci-dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

System limitsThe system could be delayed or malfunctionin the following situations:

– A natural, even tire inflation pressureloss in all four tires will not be recog-nized. Therefore, check the tire inflationpressure regularly.

– Sudden serious tire damage caused byexternal circumstances cannot be recog-nized in advance.

– When the system has not been initial-ized.

– When driving on a snowy or slipperyroad surface.

– Sporty driving style: spinning tractionwheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-ing).

– When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

ConceptIntelligent Safety enables central operationof the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help pre-vent an imminent collision.

– Approach control warning with Citylight braking function, refer topage 181.

– Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation,refer to page 184.

Safety information

Warning


Seite 180

CONTROLS Safety


Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver’s personal judg-ment. Due to its limits, the system may notissue warnings or reactions, or these maybe issued late or in a manner that is notconsistent with their normal use. There isa risk of accident. Adjust driving style totraffic conditions. Watch traffic closelyand actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/offSome Intelligent Safety systems are auto-matically active after every departure. SomeIntelligent Safety systems activate accord-ing to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the IntelligentSafety system is displayed. Thesystems are individuallyswitched off according to theirrespective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-ual settings are stored for the driver profilecurrently in use.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systemsare switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systemsare switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Approach control warningwith city light braking func-tion

ConceptThe system may prevent some accidents. Inthe event of an accident, the system may re-duce impact speed.

The system sounds a warning before an im-minent collision and activates brakes inde-pendently, if needed.

The Brake Assistant function activates andapplies the brakes with limited force andduration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirrorcontrols the system.

The approach control warning is availableeven if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehi-cle intentionally, the approach control warn-ing and braking are delayed in order toavoid false system reactions.

General informationThe system warns at two levels of an immi-nent danger of collision at speeds from ap-

Seite 181

Safety CONTROLS


prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn-ings may vary with the current drivingsituation.

Braking is performed at speeds up to ap-proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect aretaken into account.

Safety information

Warning


Warning


Overview



Camera



Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after ev-ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually


– The menu for the IntelligentSafety system is displayed. Thesystems are individually

Seite 182

CONTROLS Safety


switched off according to theirrespective settings.



Press button again:



Hold down button:



Setting the warning timeThe warning time can be set via the CentralInformation Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"


3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"


The selected warning time is stored for thedriver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

DisplayA warning symbol appears in the instru-ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if acollision with a detected vehicle is immi-nent.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarn-ing.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds: acutewarning.

Brake and make an evasive ma-neuver, if necessary.

PrewarningThis warning is provided, for instance whenthere is impending danger of a collision orthe distance to the vehicle ahead is toosmall.

If a prewarning is provided, respond bybraking as warranted.

Acute warning with braking functionAn acute warning is displayed when thereis an imminent danger of collision due tothe vehicle approaching another object at ahigh speed.

The driver must intervene actively whenthere is an acute warning. If necessary, thedriver is assisted by a minor automaticbraking intervention in a possible risk ofcollision.

Acute warnings may be provided even whenthere has been no prior warning.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver to inter-vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-ing force is used. In order to activate theBrake Assistant function, you must applythe brakes quickly and forcefully. If there isa risk of collision, the system may assistwith braking. When the vehicle is travelingat a low speed, the vehicle may come to acomplete stop.

Seite 183

Safety CONTROLS


The braking intervention occurs only if ve-hicle stability has not been restricted,for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy-namic Stability Control.

The driver may interrupt the braking inter-vention function by stepping on the acceler-ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-ing wheel.

The system’s ability to detect objects maybe limited in some circumstances. Refer tothe information in this Owner’s Manual re-garding the limitations of the system andactively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-tain conditions and circumstances. Due toconditions or other factors, the systemmay not respond. There may be a risk ofaccident or risk of damage to property. Ac-tively intervene as warranted. Refer to theinformation in this Owner’s Manual re-garding the scope of the system’s opera-tion and limitations.

Detection rangeThe system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come ormight come late.

The following situations may not be de-tected, for example:

– Slow moving vehicles when you ap-proach them at high speed.

– Vehicles that suddenly swerve in frontof you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

– Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-ance.

– Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional inthe following situations:


– In tight curves.

– If the field of view of the camera or thewindshield is dirty or covered.

– If the driving stability control systemsare deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

– Up to 10 seconds after the start of theengine via the Start/Stop button.


– If there are constant blinding effects be-cause of oncoming light, for instancefrom the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivityThe more sensitive the warning settingsare, the more warnings are displayed.Therefore, there may also be an excess ofpremature or unjustified warnings and reac-tions.

Daytime pedestrian collisionmitigation

ConceptThe system may prevent some accidentswith pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the systemwill issue a warning if there is imminentrisk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-port this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mir-ror controls the system.

Seite 184

CONTROLS Safety


General informationIn sufficiently bright conditions, the systemissues a warning of a possible risk of colli-sion with pedestrians in the speed rangefrom approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.35 mph/60 km/h

The system reacts to people who are withinthe detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle isdivided into two areas:

– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front ofthe vehicle.

– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right andleft of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-cated within the central area. A warning isissued about pedestrians who are locatedwithin the extended area only if they aremoving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning


Warning


Overview



Camera



Seite 185

Safety CONTROLS


Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after ev-ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually


– The menu for the IntelligentSafety system is displayed. Thesystems are individuallyswitched off according to theirrespective settings.



Press button again:



Hold down button:



Warning with braking function

DisplayIf a collision with a detected person is im-minent, a warning symbol appears on theinstrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis-play.

The red symbol is displayed and asignal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking ormake an evasive maneuver.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver to inter-vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-ing force is used. In order to activate theBrake Assistant function, you must applythe brakes quickly and forcefully. If there isa risk of collision, the system may assistwith braking. When the vehicle is travelingat a low speed, the vehicle may come to acomplete stop.

The braking intervention occurs only if ve-hicle stability has not been restricted,for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy-namic Stability Control.

The driver may interrupt the braking inter-vention function by stepping on the acceler-ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-ing wheel.

The system’s ability to detect objects maybe limited in some circumstances. Refer tothe information in this Owner’s Manual re-garding the limitations of the system andactively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning


Detection rangeThe detection potential of the camera is lim-ited.

Seite 186

CONTROLS Safety


Thus, a warning might not be issued or beissued late.

The following situations may not be de-tected, for example:

– Partially covered pedestrians.

– Pedestrians that are not detected assuch because of the viewing angle orcontour.

– Pedestrians outside of the detectionrange.

– Pedestrians having a body size less than32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional ormay not be available in the following situa-tions:




– If the driving stability control systemsare deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

– Up to 10 seconds after the start of theengine via the Start/Stop button.


– If there are constant blinding effects be-cause of oncoming light, for instancefrom the sun low in the sky.

– When it is dark outside.

Brake force display

ConceptAdditional brake lights indicate emergencybraking to the traffic behind. This can re-duce the risk of a rear-end collision.

General information

– During normal brake application, thebrake lights light up.

– During heavy brake application, theflashers additionally light up.

Fatigue alert

ConceptThe system can detect decreasing alertnessor fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-nous trips, for instance on highways. In thissituation, it is recommended that the drivertakes a break.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing one's physical state. An increasinglack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-tected or not be detected in time. There isa risk of accident. Make sure that thedriver is rested and alert. Adjust drivingstyle to traffic conditions.

FunctionThe system is switched on each time the en-gine is started and cannot be switched off.

Seite 187

Safety CONTROLS


After travel has begun, the system monitorscertain aspects of the driver's behavior, sothat decreasing alertness or fatigue can bedetected.

This procedure takes the following criteriainto account:

– Personal driving style, for instancesteering behavior.

– Driving conditions, for instance time,length of trip.

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,the system is active and can display a rec-ommendation to take a break.

Break recommendationIf the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,a message is displayed in the Control Dis-play with the recommendation to take abreak.

A recommendation to take a break is dis-played only once during an uninterruptedtrip.

After a break, another recommendation totake a break cannot be displayed until afterapproximately 45 minutes.

System limitsThe function may be limited in the follow-ing situations and may issue an incorrectwarning or no warning at all:

– When the clock is set incorrectly.

– When the vehicle speed is mainly belowabout 43 mph/70 km/h.

– With a sporty driving style, such as dur-ing rapid acceleration or when corner-ing fast.

– In active driving situations, such aswhen changing lanes frequently.

– When the road surface is poor.

– In the event of strong side winds.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the

case of a break during longer trips on high-ways.

PostCrash – iBrake

ConceptIn the event of an accident, the system canbring the vehicle to a halt automaticallywithout intervention by the driver in cer-tain situations. This can reduce the risk of afurther collision and the consequencesthereof.

At standstillAfter coming to a halt, the brake is releasedautomatically. Secure the vehicle againstrolling.

Harder vehicle brakingIn certain situations, it can be necessary tobring the vehicle to a halt more quickly thanthe Brake Assistant allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to thebrake. For a brief period, the braking pres-sure will be higher than the braking pres-sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-ing function. This interrupts automaticbraking.

Interrupting automatic brakingIt can be necessary to interrupt automaticbraking in certain situations, for instancefor an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

– By pressing the brake pedal.

– By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Seite 188

CONTROLS Safety


Driving stability control systems



Anti-lock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels duringbraking.

The vehicle maintains its steering powereven during full brake applications, thus in-creasing active safety.

ABS is operational every time you start theengine.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys-tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak-ing capability to the furthest possible ex-tent. It reduces the braking distance to aminimum during an emergency stop. Thissystem utilizes all of the capabilities pro-vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brakepedal for the duration of the emergencystop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

ConceptWithin the physical limits, the system helpsto keep the vehicle on a steady course byreducing engine speed and by applyingbrakes to the individual wheels.

To improve traction, the drive type may bechanged, refer to page 69.

General informationDSC detects the following unstable drivingconditions, for instance:

– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-ing.

– Loss of traction of the front wheels,which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer topage 190, is a version of the DSC where for-ward momentum is optimized.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing the traffic conditions. Based onthe limits of the system, it cannot inde-pendently react to all traffic situations.There is a risk of accident. Adjust drivingstyle to traffic conditions. Watch trafficclosely and actively intervene where ap-propriate.

Seite 189

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS


Warning

When driving with a roof load, for in-stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-ping in critical driving situations. Theremay be a risk of accident or risk of damageto property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy-namic Stability Control when driving withroof load.

Indicator/warning lightsThe indicator light flashes: DSC con-trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC hasmalfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General informationDepending on the operating state of thehigh-voltage system, the drive of the vehicleautomatically switches between front-wheel, rear-wheel and four-wheel drive. IfDSC is deactivated, this may result in auto-matic change of the drive type for unstabledriving situations.

When DSC is deactivated, driving stabilityis reduced during acceleration and whendriving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSCagain as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but notlonger than approx. 10 seconds, un-til the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up in the instrument cluster and dis-plays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicatorlight go out.

Indicator/warning lightsWhen DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC isdeactivated.

Automatic activationWhen DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-tion occurs in the following situations:

– The vehicle has a flat tire.

– When activating cruise control inTRACTION or DSC OFF mode.

DTC Dynamic Traction Con-trol

ConceptDTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-ity Control where forward momentum is op-timized.

The system ensures maximum headway onspecial road conditions, for instance unp-lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces,but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle hasmaximum traction. Driving stability is lim-ited during acceleration and when drivingin curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activateDTC under the following special circum-stances:

Seite 190

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems


– When driving in slush or on uncleared,snow-covered roads.

– When driving off from deep snow orloose ground.

– When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTCDynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the in-strument cluster and the indicator light forDSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-tor light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility ofthe vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels arebraked individually when a sporty drivingstyle is used.

Due to the variable drive configuration, thisintervention can be done either on the frontaxle, the rear axle or on both axles simulta-neously.

MINI Driving Modes switch

ConceptThe MINI Driving Modes switch helps tofine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switchwill activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

MINI Driving Modes switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MIDMID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is acti-vated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

ConceptGREEN, refer to page 249, provides consis-tent tuning to maximize range.

Activating GREENPress the MINI Driving Modes switchdownward until GREEN is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved whenGREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

Seite 191

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS




This configuration is retrieved whenGREEN is activated.

SPORT

ConceptConsistently sporty tuning of the drivetrainfor greater driving agility.

Activating SPORTPress the MINI Driving Modes switch up-ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.

Configuring driving programSettings can be made for the following driv-ing programs in Driving mode:

– GREEN, refer to page 191.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI DrivingModes switch displays a list ofprograms, which can be se-lected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster dis-plays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

ConceptThis system supports driving off on uphillgrades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-offassistant1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive offwithout delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicleis held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent powersteering function.

The system provides the steering force withmore support at low speeds than at higherones. This makes it easier to park, for in-stance, and makes steering firmer whendriving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-cording to the driving program, so that afirm, sporty feel or a comfortable steeringresponse is conveyed.

Seite 192

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems


Driving comfort



Camera-based cruise control

ConceptUsing this system, a desired speed and adistance to a vehicle ahead can be adjustedusing the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the desired speed onclear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac-celerates or brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle sothat the set distance to the vehicle ahead ismaintained. The speed is adjusted as far asthe given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted in severalsteps. For safety reasons, it depends on therespective speed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronictransmissions: if the vehicle ahead of youbrakes to a halt, and then proceeds to driveagain shortly thereafter, the system is ableto detect this within the given system lim-its.

General informationA camera on the interior mirror is used todetect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the settings, the characteris-tics of cruise control many change in cer-tain ranges.

Safety information

Warning


Warning

The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-justed or called up by mistake. There is arisk of accident. Adjust the desired speedto the traffic conditions. Watch trafficclosely and actively intervene where ap-propriate.

Warning

Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-ferences to other vehicles, for instance inthe following situations:

– When fast approaching a slowly mov-ing vehicle.

– Vehicle suddenly swerving into ownlane.

Seite 193

Driving comfort CONTROLS


– When fast approaching standing ve-hicles.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Watch traffic closely and actively inter-vene where appropriate.

Warning






Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer topage 195.

Store/maintain speed, refer topage 195.

Pause cruise control, refer topage 195.

Continue cruise control with thelast setting, refer to page 196.

Reduce distance, refer topage 196.

Increase the distance, refer topage 196.

Button Function

Increase speed, refer topage 195.

Reduce speed, refer to page 195.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle'sseries, optional features and country speci-fications.

Camera




Speed rangeThe system is best used on well-constructedroads.

The system is functional at speeds begin-ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronictransmissions: the system can also be acti-vated while the vehicle is stationary.

The max. speed that can be set is85 mph/140 km/h.

Seite 194

CONTROLS Driving comfort


Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steeringwheel.

Display in the instrument clusterlights up.

Display in the instrument clusterlights up. The current speed isadopted as desired speed and dis-

played with symbol.

Cruise control is active and maintains theset speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switchedon, if necessary.

Switching offWith the Stop&Go function for Steptronictransmissions: when switching off whilestationary, depress the brake pedal simulta-neously.


The displays go out. The stored desiredspeed is deleted.

Interrupting manually


With the Stop&Go function for Steptronictransmissions: when interrupting while sta-tionary, depress the brake pedal simultane-ously.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is automatically interrupted inthe following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Controlis deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-venes.

– If the detection range of the camera isimpaired, for instance by soiling, heavyprecipitation or glare effects from thesun.

– With the Stop&Go function for Step-tronic transmissions: following a sta-tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af-ter the vehicle was braked to a stop bythe system.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speedPress or button in the interruptedstate.

When the system is switched on, the cur-rent speed is maintained and stored as thedesired speed.

The stored speed is displayed on thesymbol.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control isswitched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored andthe vehicle reaches the stored speed whenthe road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressedto the point of resistance, the desired

Seite 195



speed increases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressedpast the resistance point, the desiredspeed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

or button: hold down to repeat theaction.

Adjusting the distance

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment. Due tothe system limits, braking can be late.There may be a risk of accident or risk ofdamage to property. Be aware to the trafficsituation at all times. Adjust the distanceto the traffic and weather conditions andmaintain the prescribed safety distance,possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

Press the button repeatedly untilthe desired distance is set.

The set distance is briefly displayedin the left part of the instrumentcluster.

Increase the distance

Press the button repeatedly untilthe desired distance is set.

The set distance is briefly displayedin the left part of the instrumentcluster.

Continuing cruise control

General informationAn interrupted cruise control can be contin-ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-rent speed and stored speed is not too largebefore calling up the stored speed. Other-wise, unintentional braking or acceleratingmay occur.

In the following cases, the stored speedvalue is deleted and cannot be called upagain:

– When the system is switched off.

– When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed anddistance

Press the button with the system in-terrupted. Cruise control is contin-ued with the stored values. The se-

lected distance is briefly displayed in theInfo Display.

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driv-ing ahead of you, but instead maintainsthe stored speed. There may be a risk ofaccident or risk of damage to property. Ad-just the desired speed to the traffic condi-tions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control offDistance control can be switched off and onwhen driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Seite 196



Or:

Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrumentcluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, pressone of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, aCheck Control message is displayed.


Desired speed and stored speed

In addition to the indicator light, thedesired speed is displayed in the InfoDisplay.

– Display lights up green: system is active,the display indicates the desired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-terrupted, the display indicates thestored speed.

– No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible thatthe conditions necessary for operation arenot currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of youSelected distance from the vehicle drivingahead is briefly displayed in the left handportion of the Info Display.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance display

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically af-ter the system is switched on.

Detected vehicle

Symbol lights up orange:

A vehicle has been detected ahead ofyou.

With the Stop&Go function for Step-tronic transmissions:

Rolling bars: the detected vehiclehas driven away.

ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti-vate ACC as follows:

– By briefly pressing the acceleratorpedal.

– By pressing the RES CNCL button.

– By pressing the or button.


Symbol flashes orange:

The conditions are not adequate forthe system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

Symbol flashes red and a signalsounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneu-ver, if necessary.

The system has been interrupted ordistance control is temporarily sup-pressed because the accelerator

Seite 197



pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not de-tected.

Distance control is temporarily sup-pressed because the acceleratorpedal is being pressed; a vehicle was

detected.

Displays in the Head-up DisplayThe information from Active Cruise Controlcan also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-play.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system andthe automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance mightnot be detected.

DecelerationThe system does not decelerate in the fol-lowing situations:

– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarlyslow-moving road users.

– For red traffic lights.

– For cross traffic.

– For oncoming traffic.

– Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-ing lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not de-tected until it is completely within the samelane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenlyswerves into your lane, the system may notbe able to automatically restore the selecteddistance. It may not be possible to restorethe selected distance in certain situations,including if you are driving significantlyfaster than vehicles driving ahead of you,for instance when rapidly approaching atruck. When a vehicle driving ahead of youis reliably detected, the system requeststhat the driver intervene by braking andcarrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

With the Stop&Go function forSteptronic transmissions: driving offIn some situations, the vehicle cannot driveoff automatically; for example:

– On steep uphill grades.

– In front of bumps in the road.

In these cases, press on the acceleratorpedal.

Seite 198



Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve,the speed is reduced slightly, althoughcurves cannot be anticipated in advance.Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropri-ate speed.

The system has a limited detection range.Situations can arise in tight curves where avehicle driving ahead will not be detectedor will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system maybriefly report vehicles in the next lane dueto the bend of the curve. If the system de-celerates you may compensate it by brieflyaccelerating. After releasing the acceleratorpedal the system is reactivated and controlsspeed independently.

WeatherThe following restrictions can occur underunfavorable weather or light conditions:

– Poorer vehicle recognition.

– Short-term interruptions for vehiclesthat are already recognized.

Examples of unfavorable weather or lightconditions:

– Wet conditions.

– Snowfall.

– Slush.

– Fog.

– Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the currenttraffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-tively, for instance by braking, steering orevading.

Engine powerThe desired speed may not be maintainedon uphill grades if engine power is insuffi-cient.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed if thesystem fails or was automatically deacti-vated.

The system may not be fully functional inthe following situations:

– When an object was not correctly de-tected.




– When driving toward bright lights.

– Up to 20 seconds after the start of theengine, via the Start/Stop button.


Seite 199



Cruise control

ConceptUsing this system, a desired speed can beadjusted using the buttons on the steeringwheel. The system maintains the desiredspeed. The system accelerates and brakesautomatically as needed.

General informationThe system is functional at speeds begin-ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the settings, the cruise con-trol settings many change under certainconditions.

Safety information

Warning


Warning

The use of the system can lead to an in-creased risk of accidents in the followingsituations, for instance:

– On winding roads.

– In heavy traffic.

– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, orwet conditions, or on a loose roadsurface.

There may be a risk of accident or risk ofdamage to property. Only use the system ifdriving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer topage 200.

Store speed, refer to page 201.

Pause cruise control, refer topage 200.

Continue cruise control with thelast setting, refer to page 201.

Increase speed, refer topage 201.

Reduce speed, refer to page 201.

Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching on


The indicator light in the instrumentcluster lights up.

The current speed is adopted as thedesired speed and is displayed withthe symbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control is active and maintains theset speed.


Seite 200



Switching off


The displays go out. The stored desiredspeed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button onthe steering wheel.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is automatically interrupted inthe following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Controlis deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-venes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speedPress or button in the interruptedstate.

When the system is switched on, the cur-rent speed is maintained and stored as thedesired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.


The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored andthe vehicle reaches the stored speed whenthe road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressedto the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressedpast the resistance point, the desiredspeed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

– or button: pressing it to the re-sistance point and holding it acceleratesor decelerates the vehicle without re-quiring pressure on the acceleratorpedal. After the button is released, thevehicle maintains its final speed. Press-ing the switch beyond the resistancepoint causes the vehicle to acceleratemore rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General informationAn interrupted cruise control can be contin-ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-rent speed and stored speed is not too largebefore calling up the stored speed. Other-wise, unintentional braking or acceleratingmay occur.

Calling up the stored speed


The stored speed is reached again and main-tained.

Seite 201




Indicator light

Depending on how the vehicle isequipped, the indicator light in theinstrument cluster indicates whether

the system is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

The desired speed is displayed to-gether with the symbol.

– Display lights up green: system isactive, the display indicates thedesired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-terrupted, the display indicates thestored speed.

– No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible thatthe conditions necessary for operation arenot currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine powerThe desired speed is also maintained down-hill, but may not be maintained on uphillgrades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

ConceptPDC is a support when parking. The systemdetects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects infront of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-jects that you are approaching slowly are in-dicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General informationThe ultrasound sensors for measuring thedistances are located in the bumpers.

The delete range, depending on obstaclesand environmental conditions, is approx.6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-lowing situations:

– By the front middle sensors and the twocorner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cmfrom the object.

– By the rear middle sensors at ap-prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

– When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing the traffic conditions. There is arisk of accident. Adjust driving style totraffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-cle surroundings closely and actively in-tervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-tance Control is activated, the warning canbe delayed due to physical circumstances.There is a risk of injury or risk of damageto property. Avoid approaching an objecttoo fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDCPark Distance Control is not yet active.

Seite 202



Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of thePDC, for instance in the bump-ers.

Functional requirementsEnsure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance withstickers, bicycle racks.

– Keep the sensors clean and unob-structed.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system switches on automatically in thefollowing situations:

– If selector lever position R is engagedwhen the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

– With front PDC: when obstacles are de-tected behind or in front of the vehicleby PDC and the speed is slower than ap-prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-stacle detection can be switched off. Via theCentral Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC activation": dependingon the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver pro-file currently used.

Automatic deactivation duringforward travelThe system switches off when a certaindriving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/offmanually

Press the park assistance button.

– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed ifthe reverse gear is engaged when pressingthe park assistance button.

Warning

Signal tonesAn intermittent tone indicates when the ve-hicle is approaching an object. For instance,if an object is detected to the left rear of thevehicle, a signal tone sounds from the leftrear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, theshorter the intervals.

If the distance to a detected object is lessthan approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuoustone is sounded.

Seite 203



With front PDC: if objects are simultane-ously located both in front of and behindthe vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-nal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selec-tor lever position P is engaged on vehicleswith Steptronic transmission.

VolumeThe ratio of the PDC signal tone volume tothe entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"


3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.


Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object canbe shown on the Control Display. Objectsthat are farther away are already displayedon the Control Display before a signalsounds.

A display appears as soon as Park DistanceControl (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented incolors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera isdisplayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

Warning


Limits of ultrasonic measurementUltrasonic measuring might not functionunder the following circumstances:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-stance coats.

– With external interference of the ultra-sound, for instance from passing vehi-cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions suchas high relative humidity, wet condi-tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strongwind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings ofother vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects suchas ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharpedges.

Seite 204



– With objects with a fine surface struc-ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

– Low objects already displayed, for in-stance curbs, can move into the blindarea of the sensors before or after a con-tinuous tone sounds.

False warningsThe system may issue a warning under thefollowing conditions even though there isno obstacle within the detection range:

– In heavy rain.

– When sensors are very dirty or coveredwith ice.

– When sensors are covered in snow.

– On rough road surfaces.

– On uneven surfaces, such as speedbumps.

– In large buildings with right angles andsmooth walls, for instance in under-ground garages.

– In automatic vehicle washes.

– Due to heavy exhaust.

– Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-stance sweeping machines, high pres-sure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a contin-uous tone alternating between the frontand rear speakers. As soon as the mal-function due to other ultrasound sourcesis no longer present, the system is againfully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-stacle detection, for instance in vehiclewashes; see Switching on/off.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and therange of the sensors is dimmed onthe Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked bya dealer's service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

ConceptThe rearview camera provides assistance inparking and maneuvering backwards. Thearea behind the vehicle is shown on theControl Display.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing the traffic conditions. There is arisk of accident. Adjust driving style totraffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-cle surroundings closely and actively in-tervene where appropriate.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment:button in the vehicle

Seite 205




Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle ofthe tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt.If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is switched on automatically ifselector lever position R is engaged whenthe engine is running.

Automatic deactivation duringforward travelThe system switches off when a certaindriving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment:switching on/off manually


– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shownon the Control Display.

Switching the view via the CentralInformation Display (CID)If the rearview camera view is not dis-played, change the view via the Central In-formation Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement– The rearview camera is switched on.

– The tailgate is fully closed.

– Keep the recording range of the cameraclear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems andtrailers that are not connected to atrailer power socket can lead to malfunc-tions.

Activating assistance functionsMore than one assistance function can beactive at the same time.

– Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius lines are indi-cated.

– Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Obstacles are marked, depending on thevehicle equipment.

Seite 206



Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on theimage of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate thespace required when parking and maneu-vering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steer-ing angle and are continuously adjusted tothe steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposedon the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of thesmallest possible turning radius on a levelroad.

Only one turning radius line is displayed af-ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-cle markings can be faded into the image ofthe rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-ings match the markings of the PDC ParkDistance Control.

Parking using pathway and turningradius lines1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

radius lines lead to within the limits ofthe parking space.

Seite 207



2. Turn the steering wheel to the pointwhere the pathway line covers the cor-responding turning radius line.

Display settings

BrightnessWith the rearview camera switched on:


2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is reached and press the Controller.

ContrastWith the rearview camera switched on:


2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objectsVery low obstacles or high, protruding ob-jects such as ledges may not be recognizedby the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, someassistance functions also consider data fromthe PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park DistanceControl chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Dis-play may be closer than they appear. There-

fore, do not estimate the distance from theobjects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

This system assists the driver in parkingparallel to the road.

General informationParking assistant handling is divided intothree steps:

– Switching on and activating.

– Parking space search.

– Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaceson both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the bestpossible parking line and takes control ofsteering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on requiredactions are displayed on the Control Dis-play.

A component of the parking assistant is thePDC Park Distance Control.

Seite 208



Safety information

Warning


NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicleover or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Watch traffic closely andactively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-tance Control applies in addition.

Overview



Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-ing spaces are located on the wheel hous-ing.


Ultrasound sensorsEnsure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance withstickers.

– Keep the sensors clean and unob-structed.

For measuring parking spaces– Maximum speed while driving forward

approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space– Gaps behind an object that has a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Gap between two objects with a mini-mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Min. length of gap between two objects:your vehicle's length plus approx.3.3 ft/1.0 m.

– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking– Doors and tailgate are closed.

Seite 209



– The parking brake is released.

– When parking in parking spaces on thedriver's side, the corresponding turn sig-nal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button


The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking spacesearch is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automati-cally.

Switching on with reverse gearShift into reverse.

The current status of the parking spacesearch is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not availa-ble.

White: the system is availablebut not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and systemstatus

– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park-ing assistant is activated and the park-ing space search is active.

– Control Display shows suitable parkingspaces at the edge of the road next tothe vehicle symbol. When the parkingassistant is active, suitable parkingspaces are highlighted.

– The parking procedure isactive. Steering controlhas been taken over bysystem.

– Parking space search is always activewhenever the vehicle is moving forwardslow and straight, even if the system isdeactivated. When the system is deacti-vated, the displays on the Control Dis-play are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button orshift into reverse gear to switch on theparking assistant, refer to page 210. Ac-tivate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at aspeed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

Seite 210



and at a distance of maximum5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space searchand possible parking spaces are dis-played on the display, refer to page 210.

3. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position willcome after gear change on the station-ary vehicle - wait for the automaticsteering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is in-dicated on the display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself, ifneeded.

Interrupting manuallyThe parking assistant can be interrupted atany time:

– Press the park assistance button.

– "Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is interrupted automatically inthe following situations:

– If the driver grasps the steering wheelor takes over steering.

– If a gear is selected that does not matchthe instruction on the display.

– If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.6 mph/10 km/h.

– Possibly on snow-covered or slipperyroad surfaces.

– If a maximum number of parking at-tempts or the time taken for parking isexceeded.

– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis-plays clearances that are too small.

– When switching into other functions ofthe radio.


ResumingAn interrupted parking procedure can becontinued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer topage 210, and follow the instructions on thedisplay.

Switching offThe system can be switched off as follows:

– Press the park assistance button.

– Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

Warning


No parking assistanceThe parking assistant does not offer assis-tance in the following situations:


Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional inthe following situations:

– On bumpy road surfaces such as gravelroads.

– On slippery ground.

Seite 211



– With accumulations of leaves/snow inthe parking space.

– With a mounted emergency wheel.

– With ditches or edges, for instance anedge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurementUltrasonic measuring might not functionunder the following circumstances:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-stance coats.

– With external interference of the ultra-sound, for instance from passing vehi-cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions suchas high relative humidity, wet condi-tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strongwind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings ofother vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects suchas ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharpedges.

– With objects with a fine surface struc-ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

– Low objects already displayed, for in-stance curbs, can move into the blindarea of the sensors before or after a con-tinuous tone sounds.

– The parking assistant may identify park-ing spaces that are not suitable for park-ing.

Tire sizeThe parking position may vary dependingon the tire size.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-tem checked by a dealer's service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 212



Climate control



Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved bythe following components:

– Emission tested passenger compart-ment.

– Microfilter.

– Air conditioning system to control thetemperature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

– Automatic climate control.

– Parked-car ventilation.

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings 2 Air flow

Seite 213

Climate control CONTROLS


3 Temperature

4 Seat heating, right 103

5 Air conditioning

6 Recirculated-air mode

7 Rear window defroster

8 Windshield defroster

9 Seat heating, left 103

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn the wheel for air flow allthe way to the left.

Temperature

Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on theset temperature.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de-sired temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooledand dehumidified and, depending on thetemperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can be cooled via the A/Cbutton with the engine running and/or withdrive-ready state activated.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshieldmay fog up briefly when the engine isstarted.

The air conditioner produces condensationwater, refer to page 245, that will exit frombelow the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-tants in the immediate environment by tem-porarily suspending the supply of outsideair. The system then recirculates the airflow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recir-culated-air mode is switched on. The supplyof outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off,fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-rior.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-lated-air mode switches off automatically af-ter a certain amount of time, depending onthe external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the airquality in the car's interior deteriorates andwindow fogging increases.

Seite 214

CONTROLS Climate control


If the windows fog over, switch off recircu-lated-air mode and increase the air flow, ifneeded.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-justed manually.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de-sired air flow.

The higher the air flow, themore effective the heating orcooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may bereduced automatically to save batterypower.

Controlling the air distributionmanually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control canbe adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the wheel to select thedesired program or the desiredintermediate setting.

– Windows.

– Upper body region.

– Floor area.

– Windows, upper body region, andfloor area.

To defrost windows and removecondensationMake the following settings to defrost thewindows and remove condensation:

– Direct the air distribution onto the win-dows.

– Increasing the air flow.

– Increase the temperature.

– Switch on the air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defrosterswitches off automatically after a certainperiod of time.

Rear window defroster


The rear window defroster switchesoff automatically after a certain period oftime.

For permanent activation, press the buttonfor longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti-vated continuously at an external tempera-ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-ing output is reduced.

MicrofilterIn external and recirculated-air mode, themicrofilter filters dust and pollen from theair.

Have this filter changed during vehiclemaintenance, refer to page 294.

Seite 215



Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left

2 Display

3 Air flow, AUTO intensity

4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual

6 Display

7 Temperature, right

8 Seat heating, right 103

9 Maximum cooling

10 Air conditioning

11 Recirculated-air mode

12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster

14 To defrost windows and remove conden-sation

15 Seat heating, left 103

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to theleft until the control switchesoff.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves theset temperature as quickly as possible, if

Seite 216



necessary by using the maximum cooling orheating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de-sired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between differenttemperature settings. The automatic climatecontrol will not have sufficient time to ad-just the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooledand dehumidified and, depending on thetemperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can be cooled via the A/Cbutton with the engine running and/or withdrive-ready state activated.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshieldmay fog up briefly when the engine isstarted.

The cooling function is switched on auto-matically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control,condensation water, refer to page 245, de-velops and drains underneath the vehicle.This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature,maximum air flow and recirculated-airmode.

General information

The function is available with external tem-peratures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ andwith the engine running.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper bodyregion. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-gram active.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with thesystem switched on.

The system is set to the lowest temperature,optimum air flow and air circulation mode.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates orheats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature arecontrolled automatically depending on thetemperature in the car's interior and the de-sired temperature setting including the se-lected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with theAUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature,AUTO intensity and outside influences, the

Seite 217



air is directed to the windshield, side win-dows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Point the side vents toward the side win-dows.

The following features are switched on au-tomatically with the AUTO program:

– The air conditioning, refer to page 217.

To switch off the program: press the buttonagain or manually adjust the air distribu-tion.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the au-tomatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the de-sired intensity from soft to in-tensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the posi-tion of the illuminated LED segment.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode

Concept

The automatic recirculated-air control AUCrecognizes odors or pollutants in the out-side air. The outside air supply is shut offand the interior air is recirculated.

General information

If the system is activated, a sensor detectspollutants in the outside air and controls theshut-off automatically.

If the system is deactivated, outside air con-tinuously flows into the car's interior.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the airquality in the car's interior deteriorates andwindow fogging increases.

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-tants in the immediate environment by tem-

porarily suspending the supply of outsideair. The system then recirculates the airflow within the vehicle.

Switching on/off

Press button repeatedly to select anoperating mode:

– LEDs off: outside air flows in continu-ously.

– Left LED on, automatic recirculated-aircontrol: a sensor detects pollutants inthe outside air and shuts off automati-cally.

– Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: thesupply of outside air into the vehicle ispermanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-lated-air mode switches off automatically af-ter a certain amount of time, depending onthe external temperature.

If windows are fogged over, switch off therecirculating mode and press the AUTO but-ton. Make sure that air can flow to thewindshield.

Adjusting the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-justed manually.

General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch offAUTO program first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de-sired air flow.

Seite 218



The manually adjusted air flow is displayedvia illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate con-trol may be reduced automatically to savebattery power.

Adjusting the air distributionmanually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control canbe adjusted manually.

Operation

Press the button repeatedly to se-lect a program:

– Windows, upper body region, and floorarea.

– Upper body region and floor area.

– Floor area.

– Windows and floor area.

– Windows.

– Windows and upper body region.

– Upper body region.

To defrost windows and removecondensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removedfrom the windshield and the front side win-dows.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with thesystem switched on.

Ice and condensation are quickly removedfrom the windshield and the front side win-dows.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-gram active.

If there is window condensation, switch onthe air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster


The front window defrosterswitches off automatically after a certainperiod of time.

Rear window defroster


The rear window defroster switchesoff automatically after a certain period oftime.

For permanent activation, press the buttonfor longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti-vated continuously at an external tempera-ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-ing output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterIn external and recirculated-air mode, themicrofilter/activated charcoal filter filtersdust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out ofthe air.

Have this filter changed during vehiclemaintenance, refer to page 294.

Ventilation

SettingThe air flow directions can be individuallyadjusted:

– Direct ventilation:

Seite 219



The air flow is directly pointed onto theperson. The air flow heats or cools no-ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-perature.

– Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, theair is directly routed into the car's inte-rior.

Front ventilation

– Turn knob for continuous opening andclosing of the vents.

– Swivel the vents to alter the direction ofthe vent flow, arrows.

Ventilation in the rear

– Lever for changing the air flow direc-tion, arrow 1.

– Thumbwheel for variable opening andclosing of the vents, arrow 2.

Stationary climate control

ConceptStationary climate control cools or heats thecar's interior prior to departure to a com-fortable temperature.

The system automatically cools, vents, orheats depending on the internal and exter-nal temperature. Snow and ice may be re-moved more easily.

General informationThe stationary climate control can beswitched on and off directly or via a presetdeparture time:

– Direct operation, refer to page 221.

– Preselected departure times, refer topage 221.

The air automatically exits through thevents to the windshield, the side windows,the upper body region and into the floorarea.

The system switches off automatically aftera certain period of time.

If stationary climate control is used duringthe charging process, less air conditioningcapacity will be required while driving. Thisoptimizes the range.

Functional requirements– Engine switched off and/or drive-ready

state deactivated.

– High-voltage battery sufficientlycharged or charging cable connected.

If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis-charged, it can take some time after con-necting the charging cable, until the sta-tionary climate control will befunctional.

– Direct operation or departure time pre-selected: depends on internal, external,and set desired temperature.

Seite 220



Make sure that the vehicle's date andtime are set correctly.

– The ensure the starting capability of thevehicle, the stationary climate controlmay be automatically switched off, forinstance after repeated switching on:switch the drive-ready state on and offand the system is available again.

– The vents are open to allow air to flowout.

Switching on/off directly

ConceptThe system can be switched on or off di-rectly.

The system switches off automatically aftera certain period of time.

Via the Central Information Display(CID)The system can be switched on or off viathe Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort climate"

5. "Activate now"

Climate control for departure time

ConceptDifferent departure times can be set to en-sure a comfortable interior temperature inthe vehicle at the time of departure.

The activation time is automatically deter-mined based on the temperature.

The system promptly switches on before theselected departure time.

The departure time is preselected in twosteps:

– Set departure times.

– Activate departure times.

Setting the departure timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"




5. "Plan comfort climate"

6. Set the desired departure time, refer topage 261.

Activating the departure timeIf a departure time is to influence theswitching on of the stationary climate con-trol, the respective departure time must beactivated first.


1. "My MINI"




5. "Plan comfort climate"

6. "Precondition for departure"

Activate the desired departure time.

The symbol on the automatic climatecontrol lights up when the departure time isactivated.

The symbol on the automatic climatecontrol flashes when the stationary climatecontrol has been switched on.

Seite 221



Interior equipment



Integrated Universal RemoteControl

ConceptThe integrated Universal Remote Control inthe interior mirror can operate up to 3 func-tions of remote-controlled systems such asgarage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-tems.

General informationThe Integrated Universal Remote Controlreplaces up to 3 different hand-held trans-mitters. To operate the remote control, thebuttons on the interior mirror must be pro-grammed with the desired functions. Thehand-held transmitter for the particular sys-tem is required in order to program the re-mote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the storedfunctions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of theremote-controlled system, e.g. the garagedoor drive, near metal objects to ensure thebest possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys-tems with the integrated universal remotecontrol, such as the garage door, may re-sult in injury, for example, body parts be-coming jammed in a garage door. There isa risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-erty. Make sure that the area of movementof the respective system is clear duringprogramming and operation. Also followthe safety information of the hand-heldtransmitter.

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the pack-aging or in the owner's manual of thesystem to be controlled, the system

is generally compatible with the integratedUniversal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

– A dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

– www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-tex Corporation.

Seite 222

CONTROLS Interior equipment


Overview

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General informationThe battery of the hand-held transmittermust be fully charged at the time of pro-gramming to ensure an optimal range of theintegrated universal remote control.


2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons onthe interior mirror simultaneously forapproximately 10 seconds until the LEDflashes green rapidly. This erases all pro-gramming of the buttons on the interiormirror.

3. Press the interior mirror button to beprogrammed. The LED on the interiormirror will slowly begin flashing orange.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for thesystem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5to 30 cm away from the buttons on theinterior mirror. The required distancedepends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desiredfunction on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and re-peatedly press and release the hand-heldtransmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. – The LED lights up green: program-ming completed.

Release the button.

– The LED flashes fast: programmingis not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir-ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-form this procedure three times tocomplete the programming proce-dure.

If the integrated universal remotecontrol remains nonoperational, con-tinue with the special features forchange code wireless systems.

– LED does not flash green after60 seconds: programming not com-pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other but-tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling codewireless systemIf you are unable to operate the system af-ter repeated programming, please check ifthe system to be controlled features a roll-ing code radio system.

Refer to the owner's manual for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio sys-tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-trol and the system also have to besynchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find outhow to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of asecond person.

Seite 223

Interior equipment CONTROLS


Synchronizing the universal remote controlwith the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re-mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the inte-rior mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing but-ton on the system being programmed,e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx.30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button onthe interior mirror for approximately3 seconds and then release it. If neces-sary, repeat this step up to three timesin order to finish synchronization. Oncesynchronization is complete, the pro-grammed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-ton to be programmed.

3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir-ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec-onds, release the button.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for thesystem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5to 30 cm away from the buttons on theinterior mirror. The required distancedepends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desiredfunction on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior mirror button and re-peatedly press and release the hand-heldtransmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED can light up in different ways.

– The LED lights up green: the pro-gramming procedure is completed.

Release the button.

– The LED flashes fast: the hand-heldtransmitter was detected but pro-gramming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir-ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-form this procedure three times tocomplete the programming proce-dure.

If the integrated universal remotecontrol remains nonoperational, con-tinue with the special features forchange code wireless systems.

– LED does not flash green after60 seconds: programming not com-pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not com-pleted, the previous programming will re-main unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys-tems with the integrated universal remotecontrol, such as the garage door, may re-sult in injury, for example, body parts be-coming jammed in a garage door. There isa risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-erty. Make sure that the area of movementof the respective system is clear duringprogramming and operation. Also followthe safety information of the hand-heldtransmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the interiormirror while the engine is running or whenthe ignition is started. To do this, hold downthe button within receiving range of thesystem until the function is activated. Theinterior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-less signal is being transmitted.

Seite 224



Deleting stored functionsAll stored functions will be deleted. Thefunctions cannot be deleted individually.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on theinterior mirror simultaneously for approxi-mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in-terior mirror flashes green rapidly.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror displayThe point of the compass is displayed in themirror when driving straight.

Operating conceptVarious functions can be called up by press-ing the control button with a pointed object,such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similarobject. The following setting options aredisplayed in succession, depending on howlong the control button is pressed:

– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

– 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steeringsetting.

– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zonesSets the particular compass zones on the ve-hicle so that the compass operates correctly;refer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 225



World map with magnetic zones

Procedure1. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of theset compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press thecontrol button quickly and repeatedlyuntil the number of the compass zonethat corresponds with your location ap-pears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. Thecompass is ready for use again after approx-imately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compassThe digital compass must be calibrated inthe event of the following:

– The wrong compass point is displayed.

– The point of the compass displayed doesnot change despite changing the direc-tion of travel.

– Not all points of the compass are dis-played.

Procedure1. Make sure that there are no large metal-

lic objects or overhead power lines nearthe vehicle and that there is sufficientroom to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compasszone.

3. Press and hold the control button for ap-prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appearson the display. Next, drive in a completecircle at least once at a speed of no morethan 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-cessful, the "C" is replaced by the pointsof the compass.

Left/right-hand steeringThe digital compass is already set for rightor left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the languagePress and hold the control button for ap-prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

Seite 226



control button again to switch betweenEnglish "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after ap-proximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shieldTo provide protection against glare, fold thesun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirrorA vanity mirror is located in the sun visorbehind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror light-ing switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontalcup holders, the cigarette lighter above it inthe center console.

AshtrayIn order to empty the ashtray, remove theashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element orthe hot socket of the cigarette lighter cancause burns. Flammable materials can ig-nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or isheld against the objects. There is a risk offire and injuries. There is a risk of damageto property. Take hold of the cigarettelighter by its handle. Make sure that chil-dren do not use the cigarette lighter.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, theycan cause a short circuit. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Replace the cigarettelighter or socket cover again after usingthe socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can beremoved as soon as it popsback out.

Sockets

ConceptThe lighter socket can be used as a socketfor electrical equipment when the ignitionor drive-ready state is switched on.

General informationThe total load of all sockets must not exceed140 watts at 12 volts.

Seite 227



Do not damage the socket by using non-compatible connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area ofthe airbags, such as portable navigationdevices, can hinder the unfolding of theairbag or be thrown around in the car's in-terior during unfolding. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that devices and cablesare not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle batterycan work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12 volt on-boardnetwork can be overloaded or damaged.There is a risk of damage to property. Onlyconnect battery chargers for the vehiclebattery to the starting aid terminals in theengine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, theycan cause a short circuit. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Replace the cigarettelighter or socket cover again after usingthe socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side inthe cargo area.

USB interface

ConceptMobile devices with a USB port can be con-nected to the USB interface.

General informationFollow the information regarding the con-nection of mobile devices to the USB inter-face in the section on USB connections, re-fer to page 62.

Seite 228



In the front center console

The USB interface is located in the front ofthe center console.

Properties:

– USB port Type A.

– For charging mobile devices and fordata transfer.

– Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

In the rear center console

One USB dual charge socket is located inthe rear center console.

Properties:

– USB port Type C.

– For charging of mobile devices.

– Charge current: max. 3 A.

Under the center armrest

The USB interface is located under the cen-ter armrest.

Properties:

– USB port Type C.

– For charging mobile devices and fordata transfer.

– Charge current: max. 3 A.

Seite 229



Storage compartments



Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle, for instance mobilephones, can be thrown into the car's inte-rior while driving, for instance in theevent of an accident or during braking andevasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-jury. Secure loose objects or devices witha cable connection to the vehicle in thecar's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats candamage the dashboard. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Do not use anti-slippads.

Overview

The following storage compartments areavailable in the car's interior:

– Glove compartment on the front passen-ger side.

– Compartments in the doors.

– Storage compartment in the center arm-rest.

– Storage compartment in front of the cupholders.

– Clothes hooks

– Storage compartments in the cargo area.

– Storage tray in the center console.

– Pockets on the backrests of the frontseats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment pro-trudes in the car's interior. Objects in theglove compartment can be thrown into thecar's interior while driving, for instance inthe event of an accident or during brakingand evasive maneuvers. There is a risk ofinjury. Always close the glove compart-ment immediately after using it.

Seite 230

CONTROLS Storage compartments


Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartmentswitches on.

ClosingFold up the cover.

Compartments in the doors

General informationThere are storage compartments in thedoors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles orglasses, can break in the event of an acci-dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.Broken glass can be scattered in the car'sinterior. There is a risk of injury or risk ofdamage to property. Do not use any break-able objects while driving. Only stowbreakable objects in closed storage com-partments.

Center armrest

General informationThe center armrest contains a storage com-partment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-rest upward, arrow 2.

Set the inclineThe center armrest can be adjusted in sev-eral tilt settings.

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holdersmay damage the cup holders or be thrownabout the car’s interior in the event of anaccident, an evasive maneuver, or forcefulbraking. Spilled liquids can distract fromthe traffic conditions and lead to an acci-dent. Hot drinks can damage the cupholder or lead to scalding. There is a riskof injury or risk of damage to property. Donot force objects into the cup holder. Uselightweight, shatterproof, and sealable

Seite 231

Storage compartments CONTROLS


containers. Do not transport hot bever-ages.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

General informationThe cup holder is located in the center arm-rest.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

To open: press the button.

To close: push both covers back in, one afterthe other.

Safety information

NOTICE

With an open cup holder, the center arm-rest cannot be folded back up. There is arisk of damage to property. Press back thecovers before the center armrest is foldedup.

Clothes hooks

General informationThe clothes hooks are located above therear doors.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks canobstruct the view while driving. There is arisk of accident. When suspending cloth-ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensurethat they will not obstruct the driver'sview.

Warning

Improper use of the clothes hooks can leadto a risk of objects flying about duringbraking and evasive maneuvers. There is arisk of injury and risk of damage to prop-erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-stance clothing articles, from the clotheshooks.

Seite 232

CONTROLS Storage compartments


Cargo area



Loading

Safety information

Warning

High gross weight can overheat the tires,damage them internally and cause a sud-den drop in tire inflation pressure. Drivingcharacteristics may be negatively im-pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-ing the braking distances and changingthe steering response. There is a risk ofaccident. Pay attention to the permittedload capacity of the tires and never exceedthe permitted gross weight.

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle, for instance mobilephones, can be thrown into the car's inte-rior while driving, for instance in theevent of an accident or during braking andevasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-jury. Secure loose objects or devices with

a cable connection to the vehicle in thecar's interior.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can shift andbe thrown into the car's interior, for in-stance in the event of an accident or dur-ing braking and evasive maneuvers. Vehi-cle occupants can be hit and injured. Thereis a risk of injury. Stow and secure objectsand cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.There is a risk of damage to property.Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargoarea.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” onyour vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca-pacity. For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1,400 lbs and there willbe five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-cle, the amount of available cargo and

Seite 233

Cargo area CONTROLS


luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 -750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-hicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load ca-pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be transferredto your vehicle. Consult this manual todetermine how this reduces the availa-ble cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weightof the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants,the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo– Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-sible, directly behind and at the bottomof the rear passenger seat backrests.

– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat isnot occupied, secure each of the outersafety belts in the opposite buckle.

– If necessary, fold down the rear back-rests to stow large cargo.

– Do not stack cargo above the top edge ofthe backrests.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

With cargo area partition net: to secure thecargo there are six lashing eyes in the cargoarea.

Without cargo area partition net: to securethe charging cable there is a lashing eye inthe cargo area, refer to page 257.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashingstraps, tensioning straps, draw straps orcargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargoarea.

Cargo cover

General informationWhen the tailgate is opened, the cargocover is raised.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle, for instance mobilephones, can be thrown into the car's inte-rior while driving, for instance in theevent of an accident or during braking andevasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-

Seite 234

CONTROLS Cargo area


jury. Secure loose objects or devices witha cable connection to the vehicle in thecar's interior.

RemovingFor storing bulky objects the cargo covercan be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retainingstraps at the tailgate.

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the bracketson the left and right.

Installing1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-

tally into the two side brackets until itaudibly engages.

2. Attach the left and right retaining strapsat the tailgate.

Storage compartments in thecargo area

Storage compartment on the sideA storage compartment is located on the leftside.

Multi-function hook

Warning

Improper use of the multi-function hookscan lead to a risk of objects flying aboutduring braking and evasive maneuvers,for example. There is a risk of injury andrisk of damage to property. Only hanglightweight objects, such as shoppingbags, from the multi-function hooks. Onlytransport heavy luggage in the cargo areaif it has been appropriately secured.

The cargo area contains two multi-functionhooks.

Storage space under cargofloor panel

NOTICE

The storage space under the cargo floorpanel is only suitable for soft objects. Hardobjects may result in damage to the vehi-cle electrical system in the event of an ac-cident. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Only stow soft objects under thecargo floor panel.

Seite 235

Cargo area CONTROLS


Enlarging the cargo area

ConceptThe cargo area can be enlarged by foldingdown the rear seat backrests or by movingthe rear seat backrest into the cargo posi-tion.

General informationThe rear seat backrest is divided at a ratioof 40–20–40. The side rear seat backrestsand the center section can be folded downseparately.

The rear seat backrests can be folded downfrom the rear.

Safety information

Warning

Danger of jamming with folding down thebackrests. There is a risk of injury or riskof damage to property. Make sure that thearea of movement of the rear backrest andthe of the head restraint is clear prior tofolding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-cured cargo can be thrown about the car’sinterior; for instance, in the event of an ac-cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.There is a risk of injury. Make sure thatthe rear seat backrest is locked after fold-ing it back.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seatbackrest while driving may occur due tounintentional unlocking of the rear seatbackrests by the straps. There is a risk of

injury. Do not fasten any objects to thestraps for unlocking the rear backrests.

Warning


Warning


Folding down the rear seatbackrest from the rear

Pull the strap. The rear seat backrest foldsforward.

Seite 236

CONTROLS Cargo area


Cargo position

ConceptThe rear seat backrests can be moved intoan upright loading position individually. Anadjustment in several tilt stages is possibleas needed.

Adjusting1. Pull the strap.

2. Set the loading position of the rear seatbackrest as required.

3. Engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrest1. Pull the strap.

2. Return the rear seat backrest to the up-right seating position and engage it.

Variable cargo area floor

ConceptWith the variable cargo area floor, the cargoarea can be configured corresponding totransport requirements.

General informationFollow instructions on securing cargo, referto page 233.

Removing the cargo floor panel1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor

panel upward.

2. Grasp the cargo floor panel at the rearand fold it upward.

3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward fromthe brackets.

Inserting the cargo floor panel1. Push the cargo area floor into the sup-

ports at a shallow angle. The cargo areafloor must engage noticeably.

Seite 237

Cargo area CONTROLS


2. Fold the cargo area floor over down-ward.

MINI Picnic Bench

ConceptThe MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfort-able seating surface on the loading lip of thevehicle.

General informationOnly use the MINI Picnic Bench while thevehicle is parked and with the tailgate open.When the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use,fold it together to prevent soiling and dam-age.

In vehicles with a no-touch opening andclosing tailgate:

If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, thetailgate can be opened or closed inadver-tently by an unconscious or alleged recog-nized foot movement.

The sensor has an approximate range of5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of thevehicle.

Safety information

Warning


OverviewThe MINI Picnic Bench is located on the un-derside of the cargo area floor.

Mounting1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor

panel upward.

2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on thefront part of the cargo floor panel and at-tach it to the rear part of the cargo floorpanel using the four snaps.

3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench to-ward the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench isfastened with magnets.

4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floordownward.

To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, pro-ceed in reverse order.

Seite 238

CONTROLS Cargo area


Folding down1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.

2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the mid-dle and pull it back and up against theforce of the magnets.

3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floordownward and place the MINI PicnicBench over the loading lip of the cargoarea. Place a protective cloth over thebumper.

Folding upFold rear part of the cargo floor panel up-ward.

The MINI Picnic Bench swings against theunderside of the cargo area floor and is fas-tened there with magnets.

Seite 239

Cargo area CONTROLS


240


DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving .................................................. 242Saving fuel ............................................................................................... 247


Things to remember when driving



Breaking-in period

General informationMoving parts need to begin working to-gether smoothly.

The following instructions will help you toachieve a long vehicle life and good effi-ciency.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safetyand driver assistance systems can reactwith a delay. There is a risk of accident.After installing new parts or with a newvehicle, drive conservatively and inter-vene early if necessary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective parts andcomponents.

Engine, transmission, and axledrive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDo not exceed the maximum engine androad speed:

– For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-cumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can graduallybe increased.

TiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufac-turing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction poten-tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrake discs and brake pads only reach theirfull effectiveness after ap-prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderatelyduring this break-in period.

Following part replacementThe same break-in procedures should be ob-served if any of the components mentionedabove have to be renewed in the course ofthe vehicle's operating life.

Seite 242

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving


General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

Warning

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-cle and can endanger occupants and othertraffic participants or damage the vehiclein the event of an accident, braking or eva-sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaustfumes may enter the car's interior. Thereis a risk of injury or risk of damage toproperty. Do not drive with the tailgateopen.

Driving with the tailgate openIf driving with the tailgate open cannot beavoided:

– Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

– Greatly increase the air flow from thevents.

– Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust gas system

Warning

During driving operation, high tempera-tures can occur underneath the vehiclebody, for instance caused by the exhaustgas system. If combustible materials, suchas leaves or grass, come in contact withhot parts of the exhaust gas system, thesematerials can ignite. There is a risk of in-jury or risk of damage to property. Do notremove the heat shields installed andnever apply undercoating to them. Makesure that no combustible materials cancome in contact with hot vehicle parts in

driving operation, idle or during parking.Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system.

Mobile communication devices inthe vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones caninfluence one another. There is radiationdue to the transmission operations of mo-bile phones. There is a risk of injury orrisk of damage to property. If possible, inthe car's interior use only mobile phoneswith direct connections to an exterior an-tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-ence and deflect the radiation from thecar's interior.

HydroplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of watercan form between the tires and road sur-face.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-planing. It is characterized by a partial orcomplete loss of contact between the tiresand the road surface, ultimately undermin-ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-cle.

Driving through water

General informationWhen driving through water, follow the fol-lowing:

– Drive through calm water only.

– Drive through water only if it is notdeeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

– Drive through water no faster thanwalking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Seite 243

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS


Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through toodeep water, water can enter into the en-gine compartment, the electrical system orthe transmission. There is a risk of damageto property. When driving through water,do not exceed the maximum indicated wa-ter level and the maximum speed for driv-ing through water.

Braking safely

General informationThe vehicle is equipped with ABS as astandard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situationsthat require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can stillavoid any obstacles with a minimum ofsteering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and soundsfrom the hydraulic circuits indicate thatABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limitthe pedal distance or block a depressedpedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-jects in the vehicle such that they are se-cured and cannot enter into the driver'sfloor area. Use floor mats that are suitablefor the vehicle and can be safely attachedto the floor. Do not use loose floor matsand do not layer several floor mats. Makesure that there is sufficient clearance forthe pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are

securely fastened again after they were re-moved, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet, salted, or in heavyrain, gently press the brake pedal every fewmiles.

Ensure that this action does not endangerother traffic.

The heat generated during braking driesbrake discs and brake pads and protectsthem against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be avail-able when you need it.

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients inthe gear that requires least braking effort.Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re-duce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effectby shifting down, going all the way to firstgear, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent brake pressure canlead to high temperatures, brakes wearingout and possibly even brake failure. Thereis a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces-sive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state, in GREEN Mode or withdrive-ready state switched off, safety-rele-vant functions, for instance engine brak-ing effect, braking force boost, and steer-ing assistance, are restricted or not

Seite 244



available at all. There is a risk of accident.Do not drive in idle state, in GREEN Modeor with drive-ready state switched off.

Brake disc corrosionCorrosion on the brake discs and contami-nation on the brake pads are increased bythe following circumstances:

– Low mileage.

– Extended periods when the vehicle isnot used at all.

– Infrequent use of the brakes.

– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaningagents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs willcause a pulsating effect on the brakes intheir response - generally this cannot becorrected.

Condensation water under theparked vehicleWhen using the automatic climate control,condensation water develops and collectsunderneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,curbs or underground garage entrances,contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler,and the underbody may occur. There is arisk of damage to property. Ensure thatthere is sufficient ground clearance availa-ble.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General informationInstallation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accesso-ries.

SecuringFollow the installation instructions of theroof rack.

LoadingBecause roof-mounted luggage racks raisethe vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,they have a major effect on vehicle handlingand steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loadingand driving:

– Do not exceed the approved roof/axleloads and the approved gross vehicleweight.

– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-tained for tilting and opening the glasssunroof.

– Distribute the roof load uniformly.

– The roof load should not extend past theloading area.

– Always place the heaviest pieces on thebottom.

– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-stance using ratchet straps.

– Do not let objects project into the open-ing path of the tailgate.

– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-celeration and braking maneuvers. Takecorners gently.

Seite 245

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS


Driving on poor roads

ConceptBecause of its greater ground clearance, thevehicle can be driven on a variety of roadtypes and qualities.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in unpaved areas, for instancestones or branches, can damage the vehi-cle. There is a risk of damage to property.Do not drive on unpaved terrain.

When driving on poor roadsFor your own safety, for the safety of pas-sengers and of the vehicle, heed the follow-ing points:

– Familiarize yourself with the vehicle be-fore driving.

– Do not take risks when driving.

– Adjust the speed to the road surfaceconditions. The steeper and more un-even the road surface, the slower thespeed.

– When driving on steep uphill or down-hill grades: add engine oil and coolantup to near the MAX mark.

– Avoid that the chassis bottom coming incontact with the ground. The groundclearance may vary depending on thevehicle load.

– When wheels continue to spin, depressthe accelerator so that driving stabilitycontrol systems can distribute the driv-ing force to the wheels. Activate DTCDynamic Traction Control if available.

After a trip on poor roadsNote the following to maintain drivingsafety:

– Clear heavy soiling from the body.

– Keep the wheels and tires free of mud,snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam-age.

Driving on racetracks

Higher mechanical and thermal loads duringracetrack operation lead to increased wear.This wear is not covered by the warranty.The vehicle is not designed for use in motorsports competition.

Seite 246



Saving fuel



General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologiesfor the reduction of consumption and emis-sion values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number ofdifferent factors.

The implementation of certain measures,driving style and regular maintenance caninfluence fuel consumption and environ-mental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consump-tion.

Remove attached parts follow-ing use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted orrear luggage racks which are no longer re-quired following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair theaerodynamics and increase the fuel con-sumption.

Close the windows and glasssunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windowsopen results in increased air resistance andraises fuel consumption.

Tires

General informationTires can affect consumption in variousways, for instance tire size may influenceconsumption.

Check the tire inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if needed, correct the tire infla-tion pressure at least twice a month and be-fore starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rollingresistance and thus raises fuel consumptionand tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-upwhile the vehicle remains stationary. Startdriving right away, but at moderate enginespeeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engineto reach its operating temperature.

Seite 247

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS


Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reducesfuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak-ing.

By maintaining a suitable distance to thevehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuelconsumption and reduces wear.

Switch off the engine duringlonger stops

Switch off the engine during longer stops,for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-ings or in traffic congestion.

Switch off any functions thatare not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rearwindow defroster require a lot of energyand consume additional fuel, especially incity and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are notneeded.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly toachieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-nance work be performed by a MINI servicecenter.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems,refer to page 294.

Using the hybrid system effi-ciently

ConceptThe vehicle's hybrid system runs automati-cally. Through foresighted driving, the hy-brid properties are efficiently used, i.e., fuelconsumption and energy recovery are opti-mized.

Optimizing energy recovery

Types of energy recoveryEnergy recovery is used to charge the high-voltage battery. Energy recovery is impor-tant for the supply of electrical componentsand thus a prerequisite for fuel efficiency.Energy recovery appears in three stagesduring coasting and braking:

– Low energy recovery: while coasting toa halt without stepping on the brake.

– Average energy recovery: while deceler-ating slightly by gently pressing thebrake pedal.

– Maximum energy recovery: when press-ing the brake pedal somewhat morefirmly provided that the pointer remainsin the middle area of the CHARGE indi-cator in the instrument cluster, refer topage 142.

Optimum energy recoveryForesighted driving and decelerating helpswith optimizing energy recovery.

As soon as the display shows the maximumenergy recovery, only press the brake pedalharder if required by the situation.

Seite 248

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel


Exemplary traffic situations for fuelefficiencyIn many driving situations, the hybrid sys-tem allows for a particularly efficient en-ergy management.

– Stop-and-go traffic:

The combustion engine is switched onor over automatically by the hybrid sys-tem.

– Driving with constant speed:

The electric motor relieves the combus-tion engine periodically by also beingswitched on.

Optimizing fuel consumption

Charging the vehicle regularlyCharge the vehicle regularly and completelyusing a suitable charging device. This willreduce fuel consumption due to the use ofelectrical energy.

Longer idle periods, refer to page 317, canreduce the charge state of the high-voltagebattery.

Avoiding the use of the combustionengineFollow the following information to avoidusing the combustion engine:

– Set the characteristics of the hybrid sys-tem to MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 123.

– Follow the indicators in the instrumentcluster regarding electric driving, referto page 142.

Using the navigation system regularlyUse the navigation system also for familiarand regularly traveled routes. When thenavigation system destination guidance isactive, the hybrid system uses the existingnavigation data. The upcoming course of

the road is analyzed. Hybrid operationadapts to the specific route sections.

The function may be restricted if the navi-gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail-able, for example.

GREEN Mode

ConceptGREEN Mode supports a driving style thatsaves on consumption. For this purpose, theengine control and comfort features, for in-stance the climate control output, are ad-justed.

Under certain conditions the engine is auto-matically decoupled from the transmissionin the D selector lever position and the en-gine is switched off. The D selector leverposition remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructionsare displayed to assist with an efficientdriving style.

Activating GREEN ModePress the MINI Driving Modesswitch downward untilGREEN is displayed in the in-strument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch1. Activating GREEN Mode.



Seite 249



Via the Central Information Display(CID)1. "My MINI"




Activating/deactivating the functionsThe following functions can be activated/deactivated:

– "GREEN speed warning"

– "GREEN climate control"


GREEN Limit– Activate the GREEN Limit:

"GREEN speed warning":

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed ofthe set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

– Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit:

"Tip at:"

Select the desired speed.

GREEN climate controlClimate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tem-perature, or adjusting the rate of heating orcooling of the car's interior consumptioncan be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and ex-terior mirror is reduced.

GREEN potential savingsShows potential savings with the currentsettings in percentages.

Indications on the Control Display

GREEN tip, driving instructionThe GREEN tip indicates that your drivingstyle can be modified to be more efficient,for example by backing off the accelerator.

Open GREEN Tip displayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "GREEN tips"

GREEN tip, symbolsAn additional symbol and text instructionsare displayed.

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style,look well ahead when driving,accelerate conservatively, anddelay accelerating.

Reduce speed to the selectedGREEN speed.

Steptronic transmission:

Switch from M/S to D and avoidmanual shift interventions.

Seite 250

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel


Seite 251



252


MOBILITY

Charging the vehicle ............................................................................. 254Refueling .................................................................................................. 263Fuel ............................................................................................................ 266Wheels and tires .................................................................................... 268Engine compartment ............................................................................ 285Engine oil ................................................................................................. 288Coolant ...................................................................................................... 292Maintenance ........................................................................................... 294Replacing components ......................................................................... 296Breakdown assistance .......................................................................... 306Care ............................................................................................................ 313


Charging the vehicle



Concept

The vehicle can be charged using variouscharging cables at charging stations orhousehold sockets. Control and monitoringof the charging process are handled com-pletely automatically. The charge currentstrength can be set via the Central Informa-tion Display (CID).

General information

High-voltage batteryThe high-voltage battery is used as an en-ergy accumulator. The high-voltage batterycan be charged by energy recovery duringthe trip or via the power grid.

In order to operate the high-voltage batteryoptimally, charge the vehicle regularly andfully using a compatible charger.

When charging via the power grid, you canchose between the following variants.

– Level 1 charging via a household socket.

– Level 2 charging via a Level 2 chargingstation.

Level 1 charging is possible via a householdsocket with a voltage of 120 volts.

For optimal use of the energy from thepower mains, charging at a charging sta-tion, for instance BMW Wallbox, is recom-mended.

Charge current

General informationThe charge current strength is indicated inamperes.

The vehicle cannot automatically detect themaximum permissible charge currentstrength of the power grid during chargingvia a household socket or charging station.

Level 1 chargingPrior to the first Level 1 charging at yourown household socket, as well as whencharging at external electrical power sock-ets in Level 1, the allowed charge currentstrength must be determined, for instanceby a qualified electrician.

The charge current strength forLevel 1 charging, refer to page 260, can beadjusted in the vehicle in three levels.

At delivery, the charge current forLevel 1 charging is set to the lowest level.

Depending on the country-specific version,one of several ampere ratings is printed onthe Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rat-ing is the limit which must be adhered tofor the vehicle if the charge current is set tothe highest level. Depending on the charg-ing cable, the charge current strength mayvary when lower levels are set.

Seite 254

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle


Overview

Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting

"Max." "Reduced" "Low"

6 A 6 A 6 A 6 A

8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A

10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A

12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A

15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A

Depending on the charge current setting,the charging duration changes.

Maintaining the charge stateTo conserve the electrical range for a latertime during the trip, SAVE BATTERY, referto page 123, can be used to maintain or in-crease the current state of charge of thehigh-voltage battery.

Safety information

Warning

Improper working with electrical currentcan lead to an electric shock due to highvoltages or high currents. There is a riskof fire or danger to life. Observe the gen-eral safety regulations when working withelectrical current.

Warning

A faulty and incorrectly designed chargingdevice at the charging location can causedamage to the vehicle and overload thepower mains at the charging location.There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that, prior to your first use of acharging location, you have the compati-bility of the following components con-firmed:

– Charging cable.

– Charging station.

– Household socket and connected cir-cuits.

Warning

Damaged or worn charging devices, for in-stance worn contacts, can heat up. Thereis a risk of fire. Only use charging devicesthat are in good condition.

Warning

Simultaneous charging and refueling posesa risk of fire if a sufficient safety distancefrom easily flammable materials is notmaintained. There is a risk of injury or riskof damage to property. Do not fill the vehi-cle with fuel and charge it simultaneously.

Seite 255

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY


Warning

Contact with live components can lead toan electric shock. High voltage is presentat the charging connection. There is a riskof injury or danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that work on the charging connec-tion, for instance cleaning, be performedby a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Charging cable

General informationUse a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charg-ing cable or the permanently installedcharging cable of a charging station tocharge the vehicle.

Different charging cables can be requireddepending on the country.

Safety information

Warning

Non-compatible charging cables or unsuit-able charging stations can heat up andcause damage to the vehicle. There is arisk of fire. Use charging cables or charg-ing stations for charging that are suitablefor the respective vehicle type.

A dealer's service center will be glad toprovide information about suitable charg-ing cables.

Warning

Improper use of the charging cable canprevent charging and lead to damage, forinstance cable fire. There is a risk of fire.Use the charging cable only for charging

the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca-bles or adapters.

Warning

Damaged charging cables can heat up orlead to an electric shock. There is a risk offire or a risk of injury. Use undamagedcharging cables only.

Level 1 charging cableThe vehicle is supplied with aLevel 1 charging cable.

Level 1 charging cables can be used tocharge the vehicle from grounded house-hold sockets. Charging at household socketconnections is performed with alternatingcurrent.

When a Level 1 charging cable is used, theefficiency values may differ from thosestated on the energy label.

Level 2 charging cableThe Level 2 charging cable makes it possi-ble to quickly recharge at sockets of desig-nated Level 2 charging stations using a spe-cial plug. Charging is performed withalternating current at designatedLevel 2 charging stations. The chargingprocess can be completed faster than athousehold sockets.

A charge current strength of up to maxi-mum 16 A is possible.

The charging cable may be permanently in-stalled at the charging station.

Seite 256



Storage

The Level 1 charging cable is located in abag in the cargo area.

Store charging cable again in the bag afteruse. Attach the bag to the designated eyelet.

If required, store the charging cable withthe installed plug cover to prevent moisturein the charging cable plug.

Connecting

Charging socket flap

The charging socket flap is located on theleft side of the vehicle.

Always keep charging socket clean and un-obstructed.

Keep the charging socket flap closed whenthe charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cableTo connect, engage selector lever posi-tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-

lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, ifneeded.

1. To open the charging socket flap, presson the rear edge, arrow. The chargingsocket flap opens.

2. Remove the cover of the charging cableplug, if needed.


4. Insert the appropriate charging cableplug, and push it in until it engages.

RemovingWhen the vehicle is locked, the chargingcable is locked. Unlock the vehicle beforeremoving the cable.

If necessary, clean the area between thecharging socket flap and charging socket,for instance from snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle keyif it is locked.

Charging cable is unlocked.

2. Press the release button on the handle,arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable atthe gripping areas.

Seite 257



Charging process is interrupted.

3. Remove the charging cable from thecharging socket, arrow 2.

4. Put the charging socket lid back on.

5. Press on the charging socket flap until itengages.

6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug,if needed.

7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable fromthe household socket or Level 2 charg-ing cable from the port on the chargingstation as applicable.

8. Stow the charging cable.

At a charging station, insert the perma-nently installed charging cable in theplace provided for it.

Emergency unlocking

The charging cable is locked when the vehi-cle is locked and during the charging proc-ess.

In case of an electrical malfunction, thecharging cable can be manually unlocked.

1. Open the hood.

2. Pull the knob.

The charging cable is manually un-locked.

3. For removing the charging cable, referto page 257.

Have the locking system of the chargingsocket checked at the dealer’s service cen-ter or another qualified service center or re-pair shop after emergency unlocking of thecharging cable.

Charging process

General informationAt high temperatures, the high-voltage bat-tery is initially cooled. There may be a delaybefore charging starts. If the high-voltagebattery is discharged, cooling of the high-voltage battery may not be possible. Thecharging process cannot be started.

If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed tohigh temperatures and direct sunlight, thismay interrupt the charging process. Charg-ing will resume automatically.

The charging process may take longer underextremely low or high temperatures.

Seite 258



Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the power mains connec-tion can lead to damage, for instance cablefire. There is a risk of injury or risk ofdamage to property. Use the charging ca-ble only for charging the vehicle, and donot extend it using cables or adapters.

Warning

If the charge current strength is adjustedincorrectly, the power mains of the house-hold socket can be overloaded and over-heat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust thecharge current strength to the powermains prior to charging on householdsockets. With unknown power networks,set on the lowest level.

Starting the charging process1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the

parking brake, if needed.

2. For planning the charging process, referto page 260.

3. Switch off drive-ready state.


5. Open the charging socket flap.

6. Connect the charging cable to the vehi-cle, refer to page 257.

7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Charging status display

Indicator light at the charging socket

An indicator light is located on the chargingsocket.

Charging status

Light Charging status

White Charging cable can be con-nected or removed.

Flashes or-ange

Charging process is beingprepared.

Yellow Charging process paused.

Flashes yel-low

Charging process is active.

Flashes redrapidly

Fault in the charging proc-ess.

Green Charging process is com-pleted.

When the vehicle is locked, the indicatorlight goes out after some time.

When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellowindicator light flashes continuously. Theother indicator lights go out after sometime.

Press the button on the vehicle key tocheck the charging state. The charging sta-tus is indicated on the indicator light. Insome cases the vehicle is locked.

Seite 259



Additional messages about the charging sta-tus, for instance the probable end of charg-ing or the planned departure time, can beshown in the instrument cluster or on theControl Display.

Planning the charging process

General informationThe charging process can be adapted toconstraints, for instance the cost of electric-ity. The vehicle controls the charging proc-ess in such a way that the charging processis completed if possible at the departuretime. A departure time must be set for thispurpose, refer to page 261.

The following settings are available:

– Immediate charging.

– Set time window for favorable charging.

– Set the charge current for charging via aLevel 1 charging cable.

If drive-ready state is switched off, changescan be made via the Central InformationDisplay (CID). Settings for the stationary cli-mate control and charging process are alsoaccepted for planned departure times.

Immediate chargingThe charging process starts as soon as thecharging cable is connected.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Plan charging/climate control"

3. "Charge immediately"

Setting the time window for favorable-rateWhen a departure time is set, a time win-dow for charging with a favorable electric-ity rate can be set via the Central Informa-tion Display (CID).


1. "My MINI"


3. "Low-cost charging for departure"

4. "Set low cost time slot"

5. Set rate begin.

6. Set rate end.

The vehicle can also start the charging proc-ess before the selected time window beginsor end it after the selected time window fin-ishes. The starting point of the chargingprocess is adjusted so the vehicle can befully charged and, if applicable, its climateadjusted by the departure time.

Setting the charge current forcharging via a Level 1 charging cableDepending on the electrical mains, the vehi-cle must be charged with a different chargecurrent strength, refer to page 254.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Settings charging current"

Settings are stored. When you changecharging locations you also might need tochange the setting for charging.

Set the charge current strength at otherhousehold sockets to the lowest level.

Stopping the charging processThe charging process can be stopped at anytime by removing the charging cable andcontinued at a later time by connecting thecharging cable. This enables, for instancethe use of other loads on the power connec-tion or prevents simultaneous high powerfrom multiple loads.

For removing the charging cable, refer topage 257.

Seite 260



Continuing the charging processIf the charging process is interrupted, forinstance through a temporary power failure,the charging process is automatically con-tinued after the interruption.

Terminating the charging process1. Remove the charging cable from the ve-

hicle, refer to page 257.

2. Stow the charging cable as required.

3. Close the charging socket flap.

4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Displays in the instrumentcluster

The charge state indicator light, refer topage 154, shows the charge state of thehigh-voltage battery in the instrument clus-ter, if the ignition or drive-ready state isswitched on. If all bars are filled, the high-voltage battery is fully charged.

Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltagesystem is still under high voltage.

Information regarding the charging processis shown on the charging screen.

Display Meaning

Ring flashes orange: the charg-ing process is being prepared.

Ring yellow: the charging proc-ess starts at the set time.

Ring flashes yellow: the charg-ing process pauses.

Ring flashes red rapidly: fault inthe charging process.

Ring green: the charging proc-ess is completed.

End of charging time or set de-parture time.

Departure time set.

Climate control activated at de-parture time.

Flashing: ventilation active.

Flashing: heating active.

Flashing: cooling active.

Departure time

ConceptFor optimum range and climate control, thedeparture time can be set before parkingthe vehicle.

General informationWith a set departure time, the vehicle ispreheated or precooled during the chargingprocess if climate control is set. Climate

Seite 261



control output is reduced during the trip.This increases the range during electricdriving.

The following settings are possible for de-parture time:

– Climate control for departure time.

– Planning of up to two regular departuretimes.

If drive-ready state is switched off, changescan be made via the Central InformationDisplay (CID). Settings for climate controland charging process are also applied forscheduled departure times.

Climate control for departure timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Precondition for departure"

Setting the departure timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Set departure time"

4. Set the desired time.

Up to two departure times can be set.

Activating the departure timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Set departure time"

Set departure times are displayed.

4. For example activate "Departure time 1".

Up to two departure times can be activated.

The set departure time will be deactivated,if the departure time was ignored threetimes in a row.

Climate control

The following settings for vehicle air condi-tioning are possible:

– Activate stationary climate control im-mediately, refer to page 220.

The range is reduced if stationary cli-mate control is activated without acharging cable connected.

– Planned climate control at the set depar-ture time, refer to page 221.

If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, thehigh-voltage battery may not be fullycharged at departure time.

Discharged high-voltage andvehicle battery

General informationIn addition to the high-voltage battery, thevehicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, whichis required for operation of the onboardelectronics.

If the high-voltage battery is discharged andthe combustion engine is started, air condi-tioning may be limited.

With a discharged vehicle battery, no oper-ation of the vehicle is possible.

Starting the vehicleIf the vehicle battery is discharged, thecombustion engine can be started using thebattery of another vehicle and two jumpercables, see Jump-starting, refer topage 308.

Seite 262



Refueling



General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer topage 266, prior to refueling.

To also ensure all engine functions underunfavorable conditions, for instance steepvehicle inclinations, at least 3 US gal/10 li-ters fuel should be refueled.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than30 miles/50 km the engine may no longerhave sufficient fuel. Engine functions arenot ensured anymore. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Refuel promptly.

Warning

Simultaneous charging and refueling posesa risk of fire if a sufficient safety distancefrom easily flammable materials is notmaintained. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Do not fill the vehi-cle with fuel and charge it simultaneously.

Tank vent

ConceptThe vehicle is equipped with a special fueltank. The fuel tank is designed for specialrequirements that arise from hybrid opera-tion of the vehicle, i.e., alternating drivewith combustion engine or electric motor.

General informationExcess pressure may build up in the fueltank as a result of gasoline vapors; thispressure is dissipated before the fuel cap isopened.

Overview

The switch is located in the storage com-partment of the driver's door.

Venting the tank1. Switch off drive-ready state.

2. Pull the switch to start the pres-sure equalization.

Seite 263

Refueling MOBILITY


The tank venting status is displayed inthe instrument cluster. In rare cases,tank venting can last several minutes.

When tank venting has finished, a mes-sage is displayed in the instrument clus-ter. The fuel filler flap is released foropening.

3. Open the fuel filler flap.

If it is not possible to open the fuel fillerflap after tank venting, pull the switchagain.

If it is still not possible to open the fuelfiller flap even after the switch has beenpulled, unlock the fuel filler flap man-ually, refer to page 264.

Fuel cap

OpeningBefore opening, vent the tank, refer topage 263.

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on therear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flapopens.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-tached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing

Warning

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can bejammed and crushed during closing. Thecap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuelvapors can escape. There is a risk of injuryor risk of damage to property. Pay atten-tion that the retaining strap is not jammedor crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise untilyou clearly hear a click.

2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en-gages.

Emergency unlockingIt may be necessary in certain situations tounlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in-stance with an electrical fault.

Seite 264

MOBILITY Refueling


The release is located in the cargo area.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pumpsymbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

3. To open the fuel filler flap, press on therear edge. The fuel filler flap opens.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by adealer's service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Follow the following when re-fueling

General informationWhen refueling, insert the filler nozzlecompletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up thefuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:

– Premature switching off.

– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzleclicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-erly after refueling, otherwise the emissionswarning light may light up.

Follow safety regulations posted at the gasstation.

Safety informationSafetyinformation

Warning

Simultaneous charging and refueling posesa risk of fire if a sufficient safety distancefrom easily flammable materials is notmaintained. There is a risk of injury or riskof damage to property. Do not fill the vehi-cle with fuel and charge it simultaneously.

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfillingof the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged bycontact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harmthe environment. There is a risk of damageto property. Avoid overfilling.

Seite 265

Refueling MOBILITY


Fuel



Fuel recommendation

General informationDepending on the region, many gas stationssell fuel that has been customized to winteror summer conditions. Fuel that is availablein winter, for instance helps make a coldstart easier.

Gasoline

General informationFor the best fuel efficiency, the gasolineshould be sulfur-free or very low in sulfurcontent.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump ascontaining metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-eling.

Ethanol should meet the following qualitystandards:

US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: comply with the current standard ineach case.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel orwrong fuel additives can damage the fuelsystem and engine. Furthermore, the cata-lytic converter is permanently damaged.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot refuel or add the following in the caseof gasoline engines:

– Leaded gasoline.

– Metallic additives, for instance man-ganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button afterrefueling with the wrong fuel. Contact adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel systemand the engine. There is a risk of damageto property. Do not use fuels with a higherpercentage of ethanol than recommended.Do not refuel with fuels containing metha-nol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the mini-mum quality can compromise engine func-tion or cause engine damage. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not fill withfuel that does not comply with the mini-mum quality.

Seite 266

MOBILITY Fuel


CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result inharmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-tionally, problems relating to drivability,starting and stalling, especially under cer-tain environmental conditions such ashigh ambient temperature and high alti-tude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered,we recommend switching to a high qualitygasoline brand and a higher octane grade— AKI number — for a few tank fills. Toavoid harmful engine deposits, it is highlyrecommended to purchase gasoline fromTop Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommenda-tions may result in the need for unsched-uled maintenance.

Recommended fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 91.

Refuel with this gasoline to achieve therated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 89.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKIRating, the engine may produce knockingsounds when starting at high external tem-peratures. This has no effect on the enginelife.

Seite 267

Fuel MOBILITY


Wheels and tires



Tire inflation pressure

General informationThe tire characteristics and tire inflationpressure influence the following:

– The service life of the tires.

– Road safety.

– Driving comfort.

– Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflationpressure may heat up significantly andsustain damage. This will have a negativeimpact on aspects of handling, such assteering and braking response. There is arisk of accident. Regularly check the tireinflation pressure, and correct it asneeded, for instance twice a month and be-fore a long trip.

Tire inflation pressurespecifications

In the tire inflation pressure tableThe tire inflation pressure table, refer topage 269, contains all tire inflation pres-sure specifications for the specified tiresizes at the ambient temperature. The tireinflation pressure values apply to tire sizesapproved by the manufacturer of the vehiclefor the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pres-sure, please note the following:

– Tire sizes of your vehicle.

– Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General informationTires heat up while driving. The tire infla-tion pressure increases with the tire tem-perature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tireinflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressurespecifications in the tire inflationpressure tableThe tire inflation pressure specifications inthe tire inflation pressure table only relateto cold tires or tires at the same tempera-ture as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levelswhen the tires are cold, i.e.:

– Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 kmhas not been exceeded.

Seite 268

MOBILITY Wheels and tires


– If the vehicle has not moved again for atleast 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine the intended tire inflationpressure levels for the mounted tires.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure in allfour tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-ample.

3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if theactual tire inflation pressure deviatesfrom the intended tire inflation pres-sure.

4. Check whether all valve caps arescrewed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflationpressureFor run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: resetthe Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Tire inflation pressures up to100 mph/160 km/hFor speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h andfor optimum driving comfort, note the pres-sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta-ble, refer to page 269, and adjust as neces-sary.

These pressure values can also be found onthe tire inflation pressure label on the driv-er's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire pressure values up to100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER SE

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specificationsin bar/PSI withcold tires

225/50 R 1895 V A/S

225/50 R 1895 W

225/55 R 1797 H M+S

225/50 R 1895 H M+S

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

205/55 R 1896 H XL M+S

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

Tire inflation pressures at max.speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning

In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob-serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres-sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on thefollowing pages. Otherwise, tire damageand accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and foroptimum driving comfort, note the pressurevalues in the tire inflation pressure table,refer to page 270, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 269

Wheels and tires MOBILITY


Tire inflation pressure values over100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER SE

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specificationsin bar/PSI withcold tires

225/50 R 1895 V A/S

225/50 R 1895 W

225/55 R 1797 H M+S

225/50 R 1895 H M+S

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

205/55 R 1896 H XL M+S

2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44

Tire identification marks

Tire size205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire loadMaximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tiresidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating

– GAWR – on the certification label on thedriver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by1.1. It must be greater than one-half of thevehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tireloads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberDOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 2119

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

2119: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelinesof the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

RecommendationRegardless of the tire tread, replace tires atleast every 6 years.

Manufacture dateYou can find the manufacture date of thetire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT … 2119 21st week, 2019

Seite 270



Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applica-ble on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-ture A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform toFederal Safety Requirements in addition tothese grades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. E.g., atire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends upon the ac-tual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm dueto variations in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified govern-ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor traction per-formance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest,B, and C, representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of perform-ance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band Arepresent higher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-derinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC – Run-flat tiresRun-flat tires, refer to page 274, are labeledwith a circular symbol containing the let-ters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+SWinter and all-season tires with better coldweather performance than summer tires.

Seite 271



Tire tread

Summer tiresDo not drive with a tire tread of less than0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-creased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tiresDo not drive with a tire tread of less than0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitablefor winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around thetire's circumference and have the legally re-quired minimum height of 0.063 in-ches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators aremarked on the tire sidewall with TWI, TreadWear Indicator.

Tire damage

General informationInspect your tires regularly for damage, for-eign objects lodged in the tread, and treadwear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-cles can cause serious damage to wheels,tires and suspension parts. This is more

likely to occur with low-profile tires, whichprovide less cushioning between the wheeland the road. Be careful to avoid road haz-ards and reduce your speed, especially ifyour vehicle is equipped with low-profiletires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehiclemalfunctions:

– Unusual vibrations.

– Unusual tire or running noises.

– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following sit-uations, for instance:

– Driving over curbs.

– Road damage.

– Tire inflation pressure too low.

– Vehicle overloading.

– Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-age is suspected while driving,immediately reduce speed and stop. Havewheels and tires checked. For this pur-pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop. Have vehicle towedor transported as needed. Do not repairdamaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving overobstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, athigh speed. Larger wheels have a smallertire cross-section. The smaller the tirecross-section, the higher the risk of tire

Seite 272



damage. There is a danger of accidents andproperty damage. If possible, avoid drivingover objects or road conditions that maydamage tires, or drive over them slowlyand carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancingHave mounting and wheel balancing carriedout by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General informationYou can ask the dealer's service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop about the correct wheel/tire combina-tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires which are not suitablefor your vehicle can damage parts of thevehicle, for instance due to contact withthe body due to tolerances despite thesame official size rating. There is a risk ofan accident. The manufacturer of your ve-hicle strongly suggests that you usewheels and tires that have been recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer foryour vehicle type.

Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations willhave a negative impact on the vehicle'shandling and on the function of a varietyof systems, such as the Anti-lock Brake

System or Dynamic Stability Control.There is a risk of accident. To maintaingood handling and vehicle response, useonly tires with a single tread configurationfrom a single manufacturer. The manufac-turer of the vehicle recommends that youuse wheels and tires that have been rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturerfor your vehicle type. Following tire dam-age, have the original wheel/tire combina-tion remounted on the vehicle as soon aspossible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of thevehicle recommends certain tire brands.The tire brands can be identified by a staron the tire sidewall.

New tiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufac-turing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction poten-tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Seite 273



Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-ing structures. With advanced age theservice life can be limited. There is a riskof an accident. The manufacturer of yourvehicle does not recommend the use of re-treaded tires.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does notrecommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tiresWinter tires are recommended for operat-ing on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-vide better winter traction than summertires, they usually do not provide the samelevel of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle ishigher than the permissible speed for thewinter tires, then attach a label showing thepermissible maximum speed in the field ofview. The label is available from a dealer'sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and donot exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tiresFor your own safety, use only runflat tires.No spare tire is available in the case of a flattire. Further information is available from adealer's service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axlesDifferent wear patterns can occur on thefront and rear axles depending on individualdriving conditions. The tires can be rotated

in pairs between the axles to achieve evenwear. Further information is available froma dealer's service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop. After rotating,check the tire pressure and correct, ifneeded.

Storing tires

Tire inflation pressureDo not exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure indicated on the side wall of thetire.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry anddark place.

Always protect tires against all contact withoil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

ConceptRun-flat tires permit continued driving un-der restricted conditions even in the eventof a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General informationThe wheels are composed of tires that areself-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tireto remain drivable to a restricted degree inthe event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driv-ing with a flat tire.

Seite 274



Safety information

Warning


Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewallwith RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

– Switch on the hazard warning system.

– Secure the vehicle against rolling awayby setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the frontwheels are in the straight-ahead posi-tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangleat an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

ConceptWith the Mobility System, minor tire dam-age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant ispumped into the tires, which seals the dam-age from the inside.

General information– Follow the instructions on using the

Mobility System found on the compres-sor and sealant container.

– Use of the Mobility System may be inef-fective if the tire puncture measures ap-prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

– Contact a dealer's service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

– Do not remove foreign bodies that havepenetrated the tire. Only remove foreignobjects if they are visibly protrudingfrom the tire.

– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-ant container and apply it to the steer-ing wheel.

– The use of a sealant can damage theTPM wheel electronics. In this case,have the TPM wheel electronics re-placed at the next opportunity.

– The compressor can be used to checkthe tire inflation pressure.

Seite 275



Overview

StorageThe Mobility System is located in a bag onthe right side trim in the cargo area.

Sealant container

– Sealant container, arrow 1.

– Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant con-tainer.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder

3 Tire pressure gage

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button

5 On/off switch

6 Compressor

7 Connector/cable for socket

8 Connection hose

Safety measures– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.


– Secure the vehicle against rolling awayby setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the frontwheels are in the straight-ahead posi-tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out-side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangleat an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gasescan enter into the vehicle. The exhaustgases contain pollutants which are color-less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-haust gases can also accumulate outside ofthe vehicle. There is danger to life. Keepthe exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficientventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during ex-tended operation. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Do not run the compres-sor for more than 10 minutes.

Seite 276



Filling1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of thecover of the sealant container. Do notkink the hose.

3. Slide the sealant container into theholder on the compressor housing, en-suring that it engages audibly.

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con-tainer onto the tire valve of the non-working wheel.

5. With the compressor switched off, in-sert the plug into the power socket in-side the vehicle.

6. With the ignition switched on or the en-gine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutesto fill the tire with sealant and achieve atire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant,the tire inflation pressure may sporadicallyreach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off thecompressor at this point.

Seite 277



Checking and adjusting the tireinflation pressure

Checking1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Read the tire inflation pressure on thetire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealantcontainer1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant

container from the tire valve.

2. Press the red unlocking device.

3. Remove the sealant container from thecompressor.

4. Wrap and store the sealant container insuitable material to avoid dirtying thecargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is notreached1. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back todistribute the sealant in the tire.

3. Screw the connection hose of the com-pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

4. Insert the connector into the powersocket inside the vehicle.

5. With the ignition switched on or the en-gine running, switch on the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least2 bar cannot be reached, contact yourdealer's service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-tion pressure is reached.

6. Unscrew the connection hose of thecompressor from the tire valve.

7. Pull the connector out of the powersocket inside the vehicle.

8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure isreached1. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.



4. Immediately drive approx.5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealantis evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds lessthan 12 mph/20 km/h.

Seite 278



Adjustment1. Stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose of the com-pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

3. Insert the connector into the powersocket inside the vehicle.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to atleast 2.0 bar.

– Increase tire inflation pressure: withthe ignition switched on or the en-gine running, switch on the com-pressor.

– Reduce tire inflation pressure: pressthe button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connection hose of thecompressor from the tire valve.



Continuing the tripDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer topage 178.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer topage 173.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealantcontainer of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of snow chains on un-suitable tires, the snow chains can comeinto contact with vehicle parts. There maybe a risk of accident or risk of damage toproperty. Only mount snow chains on tiresthat are designated by their manufactureras suitable for the use of snow chains.

Warning

Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam-age tires and vehicle components. Theremay be a risk of accident or risk of damageto property. Make sure that the snowchains are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to the snowchain manufacturer's instructions.

Fine-link snow chainsThe manufacturer of the vehicle recom-mends the use of fine-link snow chains. Cer-tain types of fine-link snow chains havebeen tested by the manufacturer of the ve-hicle and recommended as road-safe andsuitable.

Information regarding suitable snow chainsis available from a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 279



UseUse only in pairs on the front wheels, equip-ped with the tires of the following size:

– 205/60 R 17.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's in-structions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may re-sult in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPMafter mounting snow chains, as doing somay result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly ac-tivate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, ifneeded.

Maximum speed with snow chainsDo not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/hwhen using snow chains.

General informationThe manufacturer of the vehicle has deter-mined certain wheels and tires to be suita-ble for operation on the vehicle. Mountingof snow chains on these wheels and tires isnot permitted.

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of snow chains on un-suitable tires, the snow chains can comeinto contact with vehicle parts. There maybe a risk of accident or risk of damage toproperty. Do not mount snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General informationWhen using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, awheel does not always need to be changedimmediately when there is a loss of tire in-flation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels areavailable as accessories from a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheelchanges. Even if all safety measures areobserved, there is a risk of the raised vehi-cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under thevehicle and do not start the engine.

DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under thevehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-hicle jack to bear weight. They have thepotential to exert too much strain on thevehicle jack, causing it to tip over and thevehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Do not place supports underthe vehicle jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-turer, is provided in order to perform awheel change in the event of a breakdown.The jack is not designed for frequent use;for example, changing from summer towinter tires. Using the jack frequently may

Seite 280



cause it to become jammed or damaged.There is a risk of injury and risk of damageto property. Only use the jack to attach anemergency or spare wheel in the event ofa breakdown.

Warning

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jackcan slip away. There is a risk of injury. Ifpossible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,and slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The vehicle jack is optimized for liftingthe vehicle and for the jacking points onthe vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo usingthe vehicle jack.

Warning

If the vehicle jack is not inserted into thejacking point provided for this purpose,the vehicle may be damaged or the vehiclejack may slip when it is being cranked up.There is a risk of injury or risk of damageto property. When cranking up the vehiclejack, ensure that it is inserted in the jack-ing point next to the wheel housing.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jackmay fall off of the jack if lateral forces areexerted on it. There is a risk of injury andrisk of damage to property. While the ve-hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forceson the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-

er’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General informationThe vehicle manufacturer recommends toadditionally secure the vehicle against roll-ing away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objectsin front and behind the wheel that is diago-nal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slightdownhill grade, place chocks and other suit-able objects, for instance a rock, under thewheels of both the front and rear axlesagainst the rolling direction.

Seite 281



Lug bolt lock

ConceptThe wheel lug bolts have a special coding.The lug bolts can only be released with theadapter which matches the coding.

OverviewThe adapter of the lug bolt lock is located inthe onboard vehicle tool kit, refer topage 296.

– Lug bolt, arrow 1.

– Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.

2. Unscrew the lug bolt.

3. Remove the adapter after unscrewingthe lug bolt.

Screwing on1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If

necessary, turn the adapter until it fitson the lug bolt.

2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tighteningtorque is 140 Nm.

3. Remove the adapter and stow it afterscrewing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip

ground at a safe distance from traffic.



– Engage a gear or move the selector leverto position P.

– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out-side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

– Depending on the vehicle equipment,get wheel change tools and, if necessary,the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangleor portable hazard warning light at anappropriate distance.

– Secure the vehicle additionally againstrolling.

– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack arelocated at the marked positions.

Seite 282



Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed whenusing the vehicle jack. There is a risk ofinjury. Comply with the described handposition and do not change this positionwhile using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crankor lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-gular recess of the jacking point closestto the wheel to be changed.

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning thevehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

4. Take your hand away from the vehiclejack as soon as the vehicle jack is underload and continue turning the vehiclejack crank or lever with one hand.

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack footstands vertically and at a right angle be-neath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack footstands vertically and perpendicularly be-neath the jacking point after extendingthe vehicle jack.

7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehiclejack is with the entire surface on the

Seite 283



ground and the relevant wheel is maxi-mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheelMount one emergency wheel only, as re-quired.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.

3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheelon and screw in at least two lug bolts ina crosswise pattern until hand-tight.

If non-original light-alloy wheels of thevehicle manufacturer are mounted, theaccompanying lug bolts may have to beused as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug boltsand tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-wise pattern.

5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-clockwise to retract the vehicle jack andlower the vehicle.

6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-curely.

After the wheel change1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The

tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.

2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargoarea, if necessary.

The nonworking wheel cannot be storedunder the cargo floor panel because ofits size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the nextopportunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check to make sure the lug bolts aretight with a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Have the damaged tire replaced at thenearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 284



Engine compartment




Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Coolant reservoir, high-voltage technol-ogy

4 Oil filler neck

5 Jump-starting, positive terminal

6 Jump-starting, negative terminal

7 Unlocking, charging cable

8 Coolant reservoir, engine

Seite 285

Engine compartment MOBILITY


Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the enginecompartment can damage vehicle compo-nents and impair vehicle functions. Thereis a risk of an accident and damage toproperty. Have work in the engine com-partment performed by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service centeror repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodatesmoving components. Certain componentsin the engine compartment can also movewith the vehicle switched off, for instancethe radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.Do not reach into the area of moving parts.Keep articles of clothing and hair awayfrom moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instancelocking hook, on the inside of the hood.There is a risk of injury. If the hood isopen, pay attention to protruding partsand keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open whiledriving and restrict visibility. There is arisk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-rectly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when openingand closing the hood. There is a risk of in-jury. Make sure that the area of movementof the hood is clear during opening andclosing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed whenthe hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Make sure that the wiperswith the wiper blades mounted are foldeddown onto the windshield before openingthe hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engageon both sides. Pressing again can damagethe hood. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Open the hood again and thenclose it energetically. Avoid pressingagain.

Opening the hood1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

2. After the lever is released, pull the leveragain, arrow 2.

Hood can be opened.

Seite 286

MOBILITY Engine compartment


Indicator/warning lightsWhen the hood is opened, a Check Controlmessage is displayed.

Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx.20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Seite 287

Engine compartment MOBILITY


Engine oil



General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent onyour driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oillevel after refueling by taking a detailedmeasurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase inthe following situations, for instance:

– Sporty driving style.

– Break-in of the engine.

– Idling of the engine.

– With use of engine oil types that areclassified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear,depending on the engine oil level.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causesengine damage. There is a risk of damageto property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-gine or the catalytic converter. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not add toomuch engine oil. When too much engineoil is added, have the engine oil level cor-rected by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Electronic oil measurement

General informationThe electronic oil measurement has twomeasuring principles:

– Monitoring.

– Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance tripsor using a dynamic driving style, for in-stance when taking curves aggressively,regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

ConceptThe engine oil level is monitored electroni-cally while driving and can be shown on theControl Display.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis-sible operating range, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed.

A red indicator light indicates thatthe engine oil pressure is too low.

Seite 288

MOBILITY Engine oil


Functional requirementsA current measured value is available afterapprox. 30 minutes of normal driving withthe combustion engine running.

Displaying the engine oil levelVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"


The engine oil level is displayed.

System limitsWhen making frequent short-distance tripsor using a dynamic driving style, it may notbe possible to calculate a measured value.In this case, the measured value for the last,sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

ConceptThe engine oil level is checked when the ve-hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis-sible operating range, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed.

General informationDuring the measurement, the idle speed isincreased somewhat.

Functional requirements– Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-

tion.

– Drive-ready state is activated.

– Steptronic transmission: selector leverin selector lever position N or P and ac-celerator pedal not depressed.

– The combustion engine is at operatingtemperature.

Performing a detailed measurementVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"


4. "Measure engine oil level"

5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and dis-played via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General informationOnly add engine oil when the message isdisplayed in the instrument cluster. Thequantity to be added is indicated in themessage displayed in the instrument clus-ter.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, referto page 290.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off theignition and drive-ready state before addingengine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Safety information

Warning

Operating materials, for instance oils,greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuriesor danger to life. Follow the instructionson the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-rials into different bottles. Store operatingmaterials out of reach of children.

Seite 289

Engine oil MOBILITY


NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causesengine damage. There is a risk of damageto property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-gine or the catalytic converter. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not add toomuch engine oil. When too much engineoil is added, have the engine oil level cor-rected by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

OverviewThe oil filler neck is located in the enginecompartment, refer to page 285.

Adding engine oil1. Open the hood, refer to page 286.

2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

3. Add engine oil.

4. Close the lid.

Engine oil types to add

General informationThe engine oil quality is critical for the lifeof the engine.

Only add the types of engine oil which arelisted.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-tions in the engine or damage it. There is arisk of damage to property. When select-ing an engine oil, make sure that the en-gine oil has the correct oil rating.

Suitable engine oil typesAdd engine oils that meet the following oilrating standards:

Oil rating

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

BMW Longlife-17 FE+.

Alternative engine oil typesIf an engine oil suitable for continuous useis not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of anengine oil with the following oil rating canbe added:

Seite 290

MOBILITY Engine oil


Oil rating

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity gradesWhen selecting an engine oil, make surethat the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-lowing viscosity grades:

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil ratingsand viscosity grades of engine oils can berequested from a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timelyfashion can cause increased engine wearand thus engine damage. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Do not exceed theservice data indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou have a dealer's service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopchange the engine oil.

Seite 291

Engine oil MOBILITY


Coolant



General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives aresuitable for the vehicle. Information aboutsuitable additives is available from a deal-er’s service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the engine hot and the cooling sys-tem open, coolant can escape and lead toscalding. There is a risk of injury. Onlyopen the cooling system with the enginecooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-tives can damage the engine. There is arisk of injury and risk of damage to prop-erty. Do not allow additives to come into

contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-ing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

ConceptThe vehicle features two cooling circuits.Always check the coolant levels of bothcoolant reservoirs and refill as needed.

CheckingThere are yellow Min and Max marks in thecoolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 286.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoirslightly counterclockwise to allow anyexcess pressure to dissipate, then openit.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

Seite 292

MOBILITY Coolant


5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be-tween the minimum and maximummarks in the filler neck.

6. Close the lid.

Adding1. Let the engine cool.


3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoirslightly counterclockwise to allow anyexcess pressure to dissipate, then openit.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolantup to the specified level; do not overfill.

6. Close the lid.

7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-nated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environ-mental protection regulations whendisposing of coolant and coolant ad-

ditives.

Seite 293

Coolant MOBILITY


Maintenance



MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system indicates requiredmaintenance measures, and thereby pro-vides support in maintaining road safetyand the operational reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of themaintenance system may vary according tothe country version. Replacement work,spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wearmaterials are calculated separately. Furtherinformation is available from a dealer's serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

ConceptSensors and special algorithms take into ac-count the driving conditions of the vehicle.CBS uses these to calculate the need formaintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance corresponding toyour user profile.

General informationInformation on service requirements, referto page 150, can be displayed on the ControlDisplay.

Service data in the vehicle keyInformation on the required maintenance iscontinuously stored in the vehicle key. Thedealer’s service center can read this dataout and suggest an optimized maintenancescope for the vehicle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-hicle key with which the vehicle was drivenmost recently.

Storage periodsStorage periods during which the vehiclebattery was disconnected are not taken intoaccount.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop update the time-dependent mainte-nance procedures, such as checking brakefluid and, if necessary, changing the engineoil and the microfilter/activated-charcoalfilter.

Service and Warranty Infor-mation Booklet for US modelsand Warranty and ServiceGuide Booklet for Canadianmodels

Please consult your Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet for US models andWarranty and Service Guide Booklet forCanadian models for additional informationon service requirements.

Seite 294

MOBILITY Maintenance


The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that maintenance and repair be per-formed by a service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop. Recordsof regular maintenance and repair workshould be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-nosis

General informationDevices connected to the OBD socket trig-ger the alarm system when the vehicle islocked. Remove any devices connected atthe OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-tricate component intended to be used inconjunction with specialized equipment tocheck the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-tem. Improper use of the socket for On-board Diagnosis, or contact with thesocket for Onboard Diagnosis for otherthan its intended purpose, can cause vehi-cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-sonal and property damage. Given the fore-going, the manufacture of your vehiclestrongly recommends that access to thesocket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited toa dealer's service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop or otherpersons that have the specialized trainingand equipment for purposes of properlyutilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's sidefor checking the primary components in thevehicle's emissions.

Emissions– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.Have the vehicle checked as soonas possible.

– The warning light flashes under certaincircumstances:

This indicates that there is excessivemisfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have thesystem checked immediately; otherwise,serious engine misfiring within a briefperiod can seriously damage emissioncontrol components, in particular thecatalytic converter.

Seite 295

Maintenance MOBILITY


Replacing components



Vehicle tool kit

The bag containing the onboard vehicle toolkit is located beneath the cargo floor panel.

After use, secure the bag with the onboardvehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if thewiper falls onto it without the wiper bladeinstalled. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Hold the wiper firmly when

changing the wiper blade. Do not fold orswitch on the wiper without a wiper bladeinstalled.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed whenthe hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Make sure that the wiperswith the wiper blades mounted are foldeddown onto the windshield before openingthe hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms.

2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing outthe wiper blade, arrow 2.

4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiperblade must engage audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Seite 296

MOBILITY Replacing components


Rear wiper blade1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiperarm.

3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiperblade must engage audibly.

4. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbsLights and bulbs make an essential contri-bution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-mends that you have appropriate work per-formed by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopif you are unfamiliar with it or if it has notbeen described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer'sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer topage 297.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)Some items of equipment use light-emittingdiodes installed behind a cover as a lightsource. These light-emitting diodes are re-lated to conventional lasers and are offi-

cially designated as Class 1 light-emittingdiodes.

Follow the safety information, refer topage 297.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-tact with the bulbs can cause burns. Thereis a risk of injury. Only change bulbs afterthey have cooled off.

Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems cancause short circuits. There is a risk of in-jury or risk of damage to property. Whenworking on the lighting system, switch offthe lights in question. If necessary, heedthe bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot hold new bulbs with your bare hands.Use a clean cloth or something similar, orhold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-age the retina of the eye. There is a risk ofinjury. Do not look directly into the head-lights or other light sources. Do not re-move the LED covers.

Seite 297

Replacing components MOBILITY


Headlight glassCondensation can form on the inside of theheadlight glass in cool or humid weather.When driving with the lights switched on,the condensation evaporates after a shorttime. The headlight glass does not need tobe changed.

If despite driving with the headlightsswitched on, increasing humidity forms, forinstance water droplets in the light, havethe headlights checked.

Headlight settingThe headlight adjustments can be affectedby changing lights and bulbs. After theheadlight adjustment was changed, have itchecked and, if necessary, corrected by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Front halogen lights, bulbreplacement

Overview

Halogen headlights

1 High beams

2 Low beams

3 Turn signal

High beamsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 297.

55-watt bulb, H7.


2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re-move.

3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pullit out of the headlight toward the rear,arrow 2.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb with the bulbholder in reverse order of removal. Indoing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor-rectly positioned in the headlight hous-ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en-gages.

6. Check the position of the bulb throughthe headlight glass.

7. Close the headlight housing with the lid.Make sure that the lid engages.

Low beamsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 297.

Seite 298



55-watt bulb, H7.

1. Turn the steering wheel.

2. – On the left facing the driving direc-tion: turn the cover clockwise andremove it.

– On the right facing the driving direc-tion: turn the cover counterclock-wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-wise, and remove it.

4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, andpull it downward out of the headlight,arrow 2.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

6. Install the new bulb with the bulbholder in reverse order of removal. Indoing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor-rectly positioned in the headlight hous-ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en-gages.

7. Check the position of the bulb throughthe headlight glass.

8. Install the covers. Make sure that thecovers engage.

Turn signalFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 297.

24-watt bulb, PWY24W.

1. Turn the steering wheel.

2. – On the left facing the driving direc-tion: turn the cover clockwise andremove it.

– On the right facing the driving direc-tion: turn the cover counterclock-wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-wise, and remove it.

Seite 299



4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

5. Press the bulb gently into the bulbholder, turn counterclockwise and re-move.

6. Insert the new bulb and install the cov-ers in the reverse order. Make sure thatthe covers engage.

LED front lights, bulb replacement

General informationThe following lights feature LED technol-ogy:

– Daytime running lights

– High beams

– Low beams

– Cornering light

– Parking lights

– Fog lights

In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal-er's service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Overview

Position of the headlights

1 Turn signal

2 Daytime running lights

3 Low beams/high beams

4 Cornering light

LED bug light

1 Parking lights

2 Fog lights

Turn signalFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 297.

Seite 300



24-watt bulb, PWY24W.


2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re-move.

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

4. Press the bulb gently into the bulbholder, turn counterclockwise and re-move.

5. Insert the new bulb and install the coverin the reverse order.

LED front fog lightsThese front fog lights are made using LEDtechnology. In the case of a malfunction,contact a dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

1 Side tail lights

2 Center brake light

3 License plate light

Side tail lights

1 Brake lights/tail lights

2 Turn signal

3 Reversing lights

Seite 301



Side LED tail lights

1 Brake light

2 Tail lights

3 Turn signal

4 Reversing lights

Side tail lightsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 297.

– Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights:P21W.

– Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights:H21W.

– Bulb, turn signals: P21W.

– Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Through the opening, loosen the plugconnector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Press the latches together, arrows 1, andremove the bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-ing.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently intothe socket, turn counterclockwise andremove.

– Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights

– Arrow 2: turn signal

– Arrow 3: reversing light

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insertthe new bulb and attach the bulb holder.Make sure that the bulb holder engagesin all fasteners.

Central brake light and license platelightsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 297.

The lights feature LED technology. In thecase of a malfunction, contact a dealer'sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Seite 302



Side turn signal, bulb replacementFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 297.

Bulb: WY5W.

1. Push the side turn signal forward in thedriving direction, arrow 1, and swing itoutward, arrow 2.

2. – On the left facing the driving direc-tion: turn the bulb holder clockwiseand remove.

– On the right facing the driving direc-tion: turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise and remove.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder.

5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1,and swing it forward, arrow 2.

Vehicle battery

General informationThe battery is maintenance-free.

More information about the battery can berequested from a dealer's service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatiblecan damage vehicle systems and impairvehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-cident and damage to property. Only vehi-cle batteries that are compatible with yourvehicle type should be installed in your ve-hicle. Information on compatible vehiclebatteries is available at your dealer’s serv-ice center.

Register the battery to the vehicleThe manufacturer of the vehicle recom-mends that you have a service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopregister the vehicle battery to the vehicleafter the battery has been replaced. Oncethe battery has been registered again, allcomfort features will be available withoutrestriction and any Check Control messagesdisplayed which relate to comfort featureswill disappear.

Charging the battery

General informationMake sure that the battery is always suffi-ciently charged to guarantee that the bat-tery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated bya red indicator light.

Charge the battery in the following situa-tions:

Seite 303



– When the inspection glass on the top ofthe battery is black.

– When the take-off performance is insuf-ficient.

The following circumstances can have anegative effect on the performance of thebattery:

– Frequent short-distance drives.

– The vehicle is not used for more than amonth.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle batterycan work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12 volt on-boardnetwork can be overloaded or damaged.There is a risk of damage to property. Onlyconnect battery chargers for the vehiclebattery to the starting aid terminals in theengine compartment.

Charging the batteryCharge the battery only when the engine isoff and via the starting aid terminals, referto page 309, in the engine compartment.

Power failureAfter a power loss, some equipment needsto be newly initialized or individual settingsupdated, for example:

– Memory function: store the positionsagain.

– Time: update.

– Date: update.

– Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Disposing of old batteriesHave old batteries disposed of by adealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright po-sition for transport and storage. Secure thebattery so that it does not tip over duringtransport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overloadelectrical lines and components. There is arisk of fire. Never attempt to repair ablown fuse. Do not replace a nonworkingfuse with a substitute of another color oramperage rating.

Accessing the fusesThe fuses are located in the glove compart-ment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations,as well as the positions of any other fuse

Seite 304



boxes, is available on the Internet:www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fusetypes and locations is also found on a sepa-rate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fusesThe vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou have a dealer's service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopreplace the fuses.

Seite 305



Breakdown assistance



Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-play.

The red light in the button flashes when thehazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tail-gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General informationSome of the articles have a limited servicelife.

Check the expiration dates of the contentsregularly and replace any expired itemspromptly.

StorageThe first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

ConceptMINI Roadside Assistance can be contactedif assistance is needed in the event of abreakdown.

Seite 306

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance


General informationIn the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man-ufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

– Via a Check Control message, refer topage 144.

– Calling with a mobile phone.

Requirements– Active MINI Connected contract or

equipment version with intelligentemergency call.

– Cellular network reception.

– The ignition is switched on.

StartingIf the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,support is offered through Teleservice Diag-nosis.


1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistanceof the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, ifneeded. Select to dial the telephonenumber on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice DiagnosisTeleservice Diagnosis enables the wirelesstransmission of detailed vehicle data that isimportant for vehicle diagnosis. This data istransmitted automatically.

Teleservice HelpDepending on the country, the TeleserviceHelp enables a more in-depth diagnosis ofthe vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by re-questing it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.


3. Control Display is switched on.

4. "Teleservice Help"

The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-stored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures willbe initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-tance will be informed.

Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call

ConceptIn case of an emergency, an Emergency Re-quest can be triggered automatically by thesystem or manually.

General informationOnly press the SOS button in an emergency.

The Intelligent Assist system establishes aconnection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Re-quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora-ble conditions.

Seite 307

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY


Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements– Standby state is switched on.

– The Assist system is functional.

– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli-gent emergency call: the SIM cardintegrated in the vehicle has been acti-vated.

Automatic triggeringUnder certain conditions, for instance if theairbags trigger, an Emergency Request isautomatically initiated immediately after anaccident of corresponding severity. Auto-matic Collision Notification is not affectedby pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED atthe button lights up green.

– The LED is illuminated green when anEmergency Request has been initiated.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehi-cle until the voice connection has beenestablished.

– The LED flashes green when a connec-tion to the MINI Response Center hasbeen established.

The MINI Response Center then makescontact with you and takes further stepsto help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, theMINI Response Center can take furthersteps to help you under certain circum-stances.

For this, data is transmitted to the MINIResponse Center which serve to deter-mine the necessary rescue measures.For instance, the current position of thevehicle, if it can be established.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-sponse Center through the loudspeakers,the hands-free system, for instance, maybe broken. However, the MINI ResponseCenter may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emer-gency Request.

Jump-starting

General informationIf the battery is discharged, the engine canbe started using the battery of another vehi-cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumpercables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be usedfor jump-starting.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead toan electric shock. There is a risk of inju-ries or danger to life. Do not touch anycomponents that are under voltage.

Seite 308



Warning

If the jumper cables are connected in theincorrect order, sparking may occur. Thereis a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor-rect order during connection.

NOTICE

In the case of body contact between thetwo vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur-ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Make sure that no bodycontact occurs.

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. Thevoltage information can be found on thebattery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assistingvehicle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine com-partment acts as the battery's positive ter-minal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

A special connection on the body acts as thebattery negative terminal.

Connecting the cablesTo prevent personal injury or damage toboth vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow-ing procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-nal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-tive jumper cable to the positive termi-nal of the battery, or to the correspond-ing starting aid terminal of the vehicleproviding assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the otherend of the cable to the positive terminalof the battery, or to the correspondingstarting aid terminal of the vehicle to bestarted.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-tive jumper cable to the negative termi-nal of the battery, or to the correspond-ing engine or body ground of assistingvehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to thenegative terminal of the battery, or tothe corresponding engine or bodyground of the vehicle to be started.

Establishing drive-ready state1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at anincreased idle speed.

Seite 309



2. Establish the drive-ready state for thevehicle to be started as usual.

If the first starting attempt is not suc-cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-ing another attempt in order to allow thedischarged battery to recharge.

3. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re-verse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Transporting the vehicle

General informationThe vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towingthe vehicle with a single lifted axle. Thereis a risk of damage to property. The vehi-cle should only be transported on a loadingplatform.

Pushing the vehicleTo remove a broken-down vehicle from thedanger area, push it for a short distance at aspeed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer topage 137.

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on aloading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged whenlifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by itstow fitting, body parts, or suspensionparts.

Towing other vehicles

General informationSwitch on the hazard warning system, de-pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearlyidentify the vehicle being towed by placinga sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-dow.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of thetowing vehicle is lighter than the vehicleto be towed, the tow fitting can tear off orit will not be possible to control the vehi-cle's response. There is a risk of accident.Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of

Seite 310



the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve-hicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-correctly, damage to other vehicle partscan occur. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Correctly attach the tow bar ortow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow barThe tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-low the following:

– Maneuvering capability is limited goingaround corners.

– The tow bar will generate lateral forcesif it is secured with an offset.

Tow ropeWhen starting to tow the vehicle, makesure that the tow rope is taut.

Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enablethe vehicle to be towed without jerking.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always becarried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at thefront or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle toolkit, refer to page 296, are together in thecargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

– Use only the tow fitting provided withthe vehicle and screw it all the way in.

– Use the tow fitting for towing on pavedroads only.

– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,for instance do not lift the vehicle by thetow fitting.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended,there may be damage to the vehicle or tothe tow fitting. There is a risk of damageto property. Follow the notes on using thetow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-cated in the front and rear of the vehicle onthe right side with respect to the directionof travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the coverto push it out.

Seite 311



Tow-starting

Steptronic transmissionDo not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible dueto the Steptronic transmission.

Have the reasons for the starting difficultiescorrected by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

What to do after an accident

Safety information

Warning

Contact with live components can lead toan electric shock. There is a risk of inju-ries or danger to life. After an accident, donot touch any high-voltage componentssuch as orange colored high-voltage cablesor parts that are in contact with exposedhigh-voltage cables.

Warning

Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor-rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do nottouch fluids escaping from the high-volt-age battery.

General informationAfter an accident, comply with the follow-ing safety precautions with regard to thehigh-voltage system:

– Secure the crash site.

– Immediately notify rescue forces, police,or firefighters of the fact that your vehi-cle is equipped with a high-voltage sys-tem.

– Engage selector lever position P, set theparking brake, and switch off the igni-tion and drive-ready state.

– Lock the vehicle after exiting.

– Do not inhale any gases escaping fromthe high-voltage battery; if needed,maintain a safe distance from the vehi-cle.

Seite 312



Care



Washing the vehicle

General informationRegularly remove foreign objects such asleaves in the area below the windshieldwhen the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularlyin winter. Intense soiling and road salt candamage the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Contact with live components can lead toan electric shock. High voltage is presentat the charging connection. There is a riskof injury or danger to life.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that work on the charging connec-tion, for instance cleaning, be performedby a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

When washing, water can get into theopen charging socket. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Close the chargingsocket flap while washing.

Steam jets or high-pressurewashers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure wash-ers, components can be damaged due tothe pressure or temperatures being toohigh. There is a risk of damage to property.Maintain sufficient distance and do notspray too long continuously. Follow theoperating instructions for the high-pres-sure washer.

Distances and temperature– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.

– Minimum distance from sensors, cam-eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

– Minimum distance from glass sunroof:31.5 in/80 cm.

Seite 313

Care MOBILITY


Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic vehicle washescan cause damage to the vehicle. There isa risk of damage to property. Follow thefollowing instructions:

– Give preference to cloth vehiclewashes or those that use soft brushesin order to avoid paint damage.

– Avoid vehicle washes with guide railshigher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid dam-age to the chassis.

– Observe the tire width of the guiderail to avoid damage to tires and rims.

– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-age to the exterior mirrors.

– With rod antenna: unscrew the rodantenna to avoid rod antenna break-age.

– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-sary, rain sensor to avoid damage tothe wiper system.

Driving into a vehicle wash with aSteptronic transmissionIn vehicle washes, the vehicle must be ableto roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer topage 137.

Some vehicle washes do not permit personsin the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be lockedfrom the outside when in selector lever po-sition N. A signal is sounded when an at-tempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a vehicle washEnsure that the vehicle key is in the car.

For activating drive-ready state, refer topage 119.

HeadlightsDo not rub wet headlights dry and do notuse abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-stance from insects, with shampoo andwash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use anice scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac-tion can be reduced. The heat generatedduring braking dries brake discs and brakepads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the win-dows, to minimize loss of visibility due tosmearing and to reduce wiper noises andwiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General informationMINI recommends using vehicle care andcleaning products from MINI. Suitable careproducts are available from a dealer’s serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Cleansers can contain substances that aredangerous and harmful to your health.There is a risk of injury. When cleaningthe interior, open the doors or windows.

Seite 314

MOBILITY Care


Only use products intended for cleaningvehicles. Follow the instructions on thecontainer.

Vehicle paint

General informationRegular care contributes to driving safetyand value retention. Environmental influen-ces in areas with elevated air pollution ornatural contaminants, such as tree resin orpollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-hicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel,oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-moved immediately to prevent the finishfrom being altered or discolored.

Matte finishOnly use cleaning and care products suita-ble for vehicles with matte finish.

Leather careRemove dust from the leather regularly, us-ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grimechafe in pores and folds, and lead to in-creased wear and premature degradation ofthe leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as fromclothing, clean leather and provide leathercare roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequentlybecause soiling on such surfaces is substan-tially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirtand grease will gradually break down theprotective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General informationVacuum the upholstery regularly with avacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance withbeverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro-fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbingthe material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro® fasteners on articles ofclothing can damage the seat covers.There is a risk of damage to property. En-sure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the vehicle, use only neutralwheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents orsteam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow themanufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaningagents can destroy the protective layer ofadjacent components, such as the brakedisc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly todry them. The heat generated during brak-ing dries brake discs and brake pads andprotects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean components such as the ra-diator grille or door handles with plenty ofwater, possibly with shampoo added, partic-

Seite 315

Care MOBILITY


ularly when they have been exposed to roadsalt.

Rubber componentsEnvironmental influences can cause surfacesoiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.Use only water and suitable cleaning agentsfor cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-ber care agents at regular intervals. Whencleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-con-containing vehicle care products in or-der to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood partsClean fine wood facing and fine wood com-ponents only with a moist rag. Then drywith a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,such as lacquer thinners, heavy-dutygrease removers, fuel, or such, can damageplastic parts. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Clean with a microfiber cloth.Dampen the cloth lightly with water, ifneeded.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, ifneeded.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safetybelt webbing. Missing protective effect ofthe safety belts. There is a risk of injuriesor danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol-ution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling actionand thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with thesafety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to re-tract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limitthe pedal distance or block a depressedpedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-jects in the vehicle such that they are se-cured and cannot enter into the driver'sfloor area. Use floor mats that are suitablefor the vehicle and can be safely attachedto the floor. Do not use loose floor matsand do not layer several floor mats. Makesure that there is sufficient clearance forthe pedals. Ensure that the floor mats aresecurely fastened again after they were re-moved, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car'sinterior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean witha microfiber cloth and water or a textilecleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,rub back and forth in the direction of travelonly.

Seite 316

MOBILITY Care


Sensor/camera lensesTo clean sensors and camera lenses, use acloth moistened with a small amount ofglass detergent.

Displays/Screens/Projection lenses

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids ofany kind can damage the surface of dis-plays and screens. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Clean with a clean, anti-static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damagedwith improper cleaning. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Avoid pressure that istoo high and do not use any scratchingmaterials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfibercloth.

For stubborn soiling on the projection lensof the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-fer to page 158.

Long idle times and long-termvehicle storage

ConceptFor idle phases that last several weeks, parkthe vehicle with the high-voltage batteryfully charged, if possible.

Do not park the vehicle for longer than14 days if the electric range is exhausted.

With storage times of up to three months, ifpossible plug the vehicle into a compatiblepower source or park it with the high-volt-age battery as fully charged as possible.

General informationYour dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop canadvise you on what to consider when stor-ing the vehicle for longer than threemonths.

Safety information

NOTICE

The high-voltage battery can be damagedby excessive discharge. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Before storing the ve-hicle for an extended period, ensure thatthe high-voltage battery is fully charged.During the idle period, connect the vehicleto a charging station at a compatiblecharging location. If necessary, the high-voltage battery will be charged automati-cally. Make sure that charging is carriedout. Regularly check the charge state.

Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for lon-ger than three months with a charge statebelow approx. 50 %.

Seite 317

Care MOBILITY


318


REFERENCE

Technical data ......................................................................................... 320Appendix .................................................................................................. 322Everything from A to Z ........................................................................ 324


Technical data




General information

The technical data and specifications in theOwner's Manual are used as guidance val-ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviatefrom this, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment, country version or coun-try-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval docu-ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-tained from a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on themodel version, equipment or country-spe-cific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into ac-count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights candeviate, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment, tires, load and chassisversion.

MINI Countryman

Width with mirrors in/mm 78.9/2,005

Width without mirrors in/mm 71.7/1,822

Height in/mm 61.4/1,559

Length in/mm 169.8/4,314

Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.4/11.4

Seite 320

REFERENCE Technical data


Weights

MINI Cooper SE Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,016/2,275

Load lbs/kg 988/448

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,458/1,115

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,679/1,215

Capacities

MINI Countryman

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 9.5/36.0

Observe further information on fuel quality,refer to page 266.

Seite 321

Technical data REFERENCE


Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of thevehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the edito-rial deadline

The following chapters were updated in theprinted version of the Owner's Manual afterthe editorial deadline for the IntegratedOwner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

– Climate: Stationary climate control.

– Replacing components: Light and bulbreplacement: Front halogen lights, bulbreplacement.

Seite 322

REFERENCE Appendix


Seite 323

Appendix REFERENCE


Everything from A to Z

Index

A

A/C button, see Air conditioning 217 ABS, Antilock Brake System 189 Accessories and parts 10 Accident, what to do 312 ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 193 Acoustic pedestrian protection 124 AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charg-

ing cable 256 Activated-charcoal filter 219 Activating, drive-ready state 120 Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based

cruise control 193 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 180 Adapting to the course of the road, hybrid

system 143 Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis-

play 187 Additives, engine oil types 290 Adjustments, steering wheel 111 Advance climate control, see Stationary cli-

mate control 220 After washing vehicle 314 Airbags 169 Airbags, indicator and warning light 171 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air

mode 214, 218 Air conditioner 213 Air conditioning 214, 217 Air distribution, manual 215, 219 Air flow, air conditioner 215 Air flow, automatic climate control 218 Air pressure, tires 268 Air vents, see Ventilation 219 Alarm system 93 Alarm triggering 93 Alarm, unintentional 94 All-season tires, see Winter tires 274 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 53

Antifreeze, washer fluid 135 Antilock Brake System, ABS 189 Anti-slip control, see DSC 189 Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 282 Approach control warning with city light

braking function 181 Approved axle load 321 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Arrival time 155 Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic pedes-

trian protection 124 Ash tray 227 Assistance for the combustion engine 125 Assistance when driving off 192 AUTO intensity 218 Automatic climate control 216 Automatic Curb Monitor 110 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-

ger airbags 171 Automatic headlight control 164 Automatic locking 92 Automatic recirculated-air control 218 Automatic transmission with Step-

tronic 136 Automatic unlocking 92 Automatic vehicle wash 314 AUTO program, automatic climate con-

trol 217 AUTO program, intensity 218 Auto Start/Stop function 121 Auto washing 313 Average consumption 154 Average speed 155 Axle loads, weights 321

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup-port 101, 102

Seite 324

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z


Backrest, seats 100 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 306 Battery, disposing of 304 Battery, vehicle 303 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-

ing 310 Belts, safety belts 104 Beverage holder, cup holder 231 Blocking, power window 96 Bluetooth connection 60 Bottle holder, see Cup holder 231 Brake assistant 189 Brake discs, break-in 242 Brake force display 187 Brake lights, brake force display 187 Brake pads, break-in 242 Braking, information 244 Breakdown assistance 306 Break-in 242 Break recommendation, see Fatigue

alert 187 Brightness of Control Display 57 Bulb replacement 297 Bulb replacement, front 298, 300 Bulb replacement, rear 301 Bulb replacement, side 303 Bulbs and lights 297 Button, SOS 307 Button, Start/Stop 118 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 308

C

Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-tion, Entertainment, Communication 8

California Proposition 65 Warning 11 Calling up mirror adjustment 92 Calling up seat adjustment 92 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-

ligent Safety 180 Camera-based cruise control 193 Camera lenses, care 317 Camera, rearview camera 206 Can holder, see Cup holder 231 Care, displays 317 Care, vehicle 314

Care, washing the vehicle 313 Cargo area 233 Cargo area, adapting size 237 Cargo area, enlarging 236 Cargo area lid 86 Cargo area, loading 234 Cargo area, seating surface 238 Cargo area, storage compartments 235 Cargo cover 234 Cargo, stowing and securing 234 Cargo straps 234 Carpet, care 316 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas

system 243 CBS Condition Based Service 294 Center armrest 231 Center console 42 Central Information Display (CID) 44 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 157 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-

side 81 Central screen, see Control Display 46 Changes, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 10 Changing parts 296 Changing wheels 280 Changing wheels/tires 273 CHARGE, energy recovery 125 Charge state indicator, high-voltage bat-

tery 154 Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 254 Charging cable storage 257 Charging cable, unlocking manually 258 Charging screen 141 Charging, see Charging the vehicle 254 Charging, see Vehicle charging 254 Charging status, see Display of the charging

status 259 Charging the vehicle 254 Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charg-

ing 254 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification

number 15 Check Control 144 Checking the oil level electronically 288 Children, seating position 112

Seite 325

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE


Children, transporting safely 112 Child restraint system 112 Child restraint system LATCH 114 Child restraint systems, mounting 113 Child safety locks 117 Child seat, mounting 113 Child seats 112 Chrome parts, care 315 Cigarette lighter 227 Cleaning, displays 317 Climate control 213, 216 Clothes hooks 232 Coasting 124 Combination switch, see Turn signals 127 Combi switch, see Wiper system 128, 131 Comfort Access 82 Compartments in the doors 231 Compass 225 Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-

ces 60 Compressor 275 Computer, see Onboard Computer 153 Condensation on windows 219 Condensation under the vehicle 245 Condition Based Service CBS 294 Configuring driving program 192 Confirmation signal 93 Connecting device 59 Connecting mobile phone 59 Connecting smartphone 59 Connecting telephone 59 Connections 59 Consumption, see Average consump-

tion 154 Consumption, see Current consump-

tion 150 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Contact with water, hybrid system 72 Continued driving with a flat tire 176, 179 Control Display 46 Control Display, settings 55 Controller 46 Control systems, driving stability 189 Convenient closing 78 Convenient opening 77

Coolant 292 Cooling, maximum 217 Cooling system 292 Cornering light 165 Corrosion on brake discs 245 Cosmetic mirror 227 Country timer 160 Coupling, see Pairing 59 Courtesy lights during unlocking 77 Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 78 Cruise control 200 Cruise control, active 193 Cruise control with distance control, see

Camera-based cruise control 193 Cruise control without distance control, see

Cruise control 200 Cruising range 149 Cup holder 231 Current consumption 150

D

Damage, tires 272 Data memory 12 Data protection, settings 58 Data, technical 320 Date 56 Date display 149 Daytime pedestrian collision mitiga-

tion 184 Daytime running lights 165 DCC, see Cruise control 200 Deactivating drive-ready state 121 Deactivation of the hybrid system 72 Defrosting, see Defrosting the win-

dows 215 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 219 Defrosting the windows 215 Deleting personal data 58 Deletion of personal data 58 Departure times, stationary climate con-

trol 221 Destination distance 155 Device list 59 Digital clock 148 Digital compass 225

Seite 326



Dimensions 320 Dimmable exterior mirrors 110 Dimmable interior mirror 111 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 127 Display and input 44 Display, electronic, instrument cluster 141 Display, engine temperature 155 Display, GREEN Mode 249 Display lighting, see Instrument light-

ing 167 Displays 140 Displays, care 317 Displays, hybrid system 141 Disposal, coolant 293 Disposal, vehicle battery 304 Distance control, see PDC 202 Distance to destination 155 Divided screen view, split screen 45 Drive-off assistant 192 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 189 Driver assistance, see Intelligent

Safety 180 Drive-ready state 118 Drive-ready state, activating 120 Drive-ready state, deactivate 121 Drive-ready state in detail 119 Driver profiles 89 Driver profiles, exporting profiles 91 Driver profiles, importing profiles 91 Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-

ing Modes switch 191 Driving Excitement, SPORT 156 Driving instructions 0 Driving instructions, break-in 242 Driving instructions, hybrid system 248 Driving mode, GREEN 249 Driving modes 191 Driving notes, general 243 Driving on poor roads 246 Driving on racetracks 246 Driving stability control systems 189 Driving tip, GREEN tip 250 Driving tips 243 Driving with combustion engine,

POWER 124 Drying air, see Air conditioning 214, 217

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 189 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 190 DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 189 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 190

E

eASSIST, assistance for the combustion en-gine 125

Easy Opener 84 eBOOST, assistance for the combustion en-

gine 125 eDRIVE button 122 eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 69 Electrical drive-ready state 120 Electric driving, ePOWER 122 Electric driving, MAX eDRIVE 123 Electric driving, SAVE BATTERY 123 Electronic displays, instrument cluster 141 Electronic oil measurement 288 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see

DSC 189 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 264 Emergency Request 307 Emergency service, see Breakdown assis-

tance 306 Emergency unlocking, charging cable 258 Energy control 150 Energy recovery, CHARGE 125 Engine, automatic stop 121 Engine compartment 285 Engine compartment, working in 286 Engine coolant 292 Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic pedes-

trian protection 124 Engine oil 288 Engine oil, adding 289 Engine oil change 291 Engine oil filler neck 289 Engine oil types to add 290 Engine start, combustion engine 120 Engine start, jump-starting 308

Seite 327



Engine temperature, display 155 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-munication 8

Entering an address, navigation, see Own-er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainmentand Communication 8

Entering a vehicle wash 314 ePOWER, electric driving 122 Equipment, interior 222 Error displays, see Check Control 144 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see

DSC 189 Exchanging wheels/tires 273 Exhaust gas system 243 Exiting a vehicle wash 314 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 110 Exterior mirrors 109 Exterior mirrors, Automatic Curb Moni-

tor 110 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 109 External start 308 External temperature display 148 External temperature warning 148 Eyes for securing cargo 234

F

Failure message, see Check Control 144 False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 94 Fan, see Air flow 215, 218 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 104 Fatigue alert 187 Filler neck for engine oil 289 Filter, see Microfilter 215 Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil-

ter 219 Finding charging stations, see Charging sta-

tions and points of interest, see Owner'sHandbook for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

Fine wood, care 316 First-aid kit 306 Flat tire, changing wheels 280 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 178

Flat tire, repairing 275 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 173 Flat tire, warning light 174, 178 Flooding 243 Floor carpet, care 316 Floor mats, care 316 Fogged up windows 215 Fold-away position, windshield wip-

ers 130, 134 Fold back rear seat backrests 236 Foot brake 244 For Your Own Safety 10 Front airbags 169 Front fog lights 166 Front fog lights, LED, bulb replace-

ment 301 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-

activation 171 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator

light 172 Front seats 100 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 178 Fuel 266 Fuel cap 264 Fuel filler flap 264 Fuel gauge 148 Fuel quality 266 Fuel recommendation 266 Fuel, tank capacity 321 Functions, hybrid system 69 Fuse 304

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-sal Remote Control 222

Gasoline 266 General driving notes 243 General settings 55 Glare shield 227 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 99 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-

roof 97 Glove compartment 230 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 56

Seite 328



GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook forNavigation, Entertainment, Communica-tion 8

GREEN Mode 249 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 191 GREEN tip, driving tip 250 Gross vehicle weight, approved 321 Ground clearance 245

H

Halogen headlights 298 Handbrake, see Parking brake 125 Hand-held transmitter, alternating

code 223 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-cation 8

Hazard warning flashers 306 Head airbag 170 Headlight control, automatic 164 Headlight courtesy delay feature 164 Headlight flasher 127 Headlight glass 298 Headlights, care 314 Head restraints, front 106 Head restraints, rear 107 Head-up Display 158 Head-up Display, see Memory function 108 Head-up Display, standard view 159 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 234 High-beam Assistant 165 High beams 127 High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-

sistant 165 High-voltage battery, charge state indica-

tor 154 Hills 244 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-

tant 192 Holder for beverages 231 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote

Control 222 Homepage 8 Hood 286 Horn 40

Hot exhaust gas system 243 Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 HUD Head-up Display 158 Hybrid system, adapting to the course of

the road 143 Hybrid system, at a glance 69 Hybrid system, automatic deactivation 72 Hybrid system, contact with water 72 Hybrid system, displays 141 Hybrid system, safety 72 Hybrid system, working on 72 Hydroplaning 243

I

Ice warning, see External temperaturewarning 148

Icy roads, see External temperature warn-ing 148

Identification marks, tires 270 Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-

cation number 15 Ignition off 118 Ignition on 118 Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-

ter 157 Indication of a flat tire 174, 178 Indicator light, see Check Control 144 Individual air distribution 215, 219 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 89 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray, see Owner'sManual for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

Inflation pressure, tires 268 Inflation pressure warning, tires 178 Info Display, see Onboard Computer 153 Information 8 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 174 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 178 Input and display 44 Instrument cluster 140 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 141 Instrument lighting 167 Integrated key 80

Seite 329



Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-cle 67

Integrated Universal Remote Control 222 Intelligent emergency call 307 Intelligent Safety 180 Intended use 10 Intensity, AUTO program 218 Interior equipment 222 Interior lights 167 Interior lights during unlocking 77 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 78 Interior mirror 109 Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 111 Interior mirror, compass 225 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 110 Interior motion sensor 94 Internet site 8 Interval display, service requirements 150 Interval mode 129, 132 In the vicinity of the center console 42 In the vicinity of the roofliner 43 In the vicinity of the steering wheel 40 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the

vehicle 67

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 282 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 98 Jam protection system, windows 96 Jump-starting 308

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 82 Key, see Integrated key 80 Key, see Vehicle key 76 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 138 Knee airbag 170

L

Label on recommended tires 273 Label, runflat tires 274

Language, on the Control Display 55 Lashing eyes 234 LATCH child restraint fixing system 114 Leather, care 315 LED ring, central instrument cluster 157 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 297 Letters and numbers, entering 48 Level 1 charging 260 Level 1 charging cable 256 Level 2 charging cable 256 Light 163 Light-alloy wheels, care 315 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 297 Lighter 227 Lighting 163 Light replacement 297 Light replacement, front 298, 300 Light replacement, rear 301 Light replacement, side 303 Lights and bulbs 297 Light switch 163 List of all messages 57 Load 234 Loading 233 Location, vehicle position 56 Locking, automatic 92 Locking, from inside 81 Locking, see Opening and Closing 76 Locking, settings 91 Longer idle phases 317 Long idle times and long-term vehicle stor-

age 317 Long-term vehicle storage 317 Low beams 163 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-

sistant 165 Lower back support 102 Lower back support, mechanical 101 Lug bolt lock 282 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage

rack 245 Lumbar support 102 Lumbar support, mechanical 101

Seite 330



M

Maintaining the charge state, SAVE BAT-TERY 123

Maintenance 294 Maintenance requirements 294 Maintenance, service requirements 150 Maintenance system, MINI 294 Make-up mirror 227 Malfunction displays, see Check Con-

trol 144 Manual air distribution 215, 219 Manual air flow 215, 218 Manual brake, see Parking brake 125 Manual mode, transmission 138 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 264 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 203 Manual operation, rearview camera 206 Manufacturer of the MINI 10 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Matte finish 315 MAX eDRIVE, electric driving 123 Maximum cooling 217 Maximum speed, display 151 Maximum speed, winter tires 274 Measurement, units of 56 Mechanical key 80 Media of the Owner's Manual 67 Medical kit 306 Memory function 108 Menu in instrument cluster 153 Menus, Central Information Display

(CID) 47 Messages 57 Messages, see Check Control 144 Microfilter 215, 219 MID - program, driving dynamics 191 MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-tion 8

MINI driving modes 191 MINI eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 69 MINI logo projection during unlocking 77 MINI maintenance system 294

Minimum tread, tires 272 MINI Picnic Bench 238 Mirrors 109 Mirror, see Memory function 108 Mobile communication devices in the vehi-

cle 243 Mobility System 275 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 10 Moisture in headlight 298 Monitor, see Control Display 46 Mounting of child restraint systems 113 MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-munication 8

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 40 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for


N

Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-tion, Entertainment and Communication 8

Neck restraints, front, see Head re-straints 106

Neck restraints, rear, see Head re-straints 107

Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 315 New wheels and tires 273 Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 No-touch closing of the tailgate 84 No-touch opening of the tailgate 84

O

OBD Onboard Diagnostics 295 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 207 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel

grade 267 Odometer 148

Seite 331



Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,Entertainment and Communication 8

Officially use hybrid system 248 Oil 288 Oil, adding 289 Oil change 291 Oil change interval, service require-

ments 150 Oil filler neck 289 Oil types to add, engine 290 Onboard Computer 153 Onboard Diagnostics OBD 295 Onboard literature, printed 67 Onboard vehicle tool kit 296 On-call service, see Breakdown assis-

tance 306 Opening and Closing 76 Opening, from inside 81 Operating concept Central Information Dis-

play (CID) operating concept 44 Operating menus, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 44 Operation via the Controller 47 Operation via touchscreen 49 Optional equipment 9 Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air

control 218 Owner's Manual, printed 67

P

Paint, vehicle 315 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 94 Panic mode 94 Panoramic glass sunroof 97 Parallel parking assistant 208 Park Distance Control PDC 202 Parked vehicle, condensation 245 Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary

climate control 220 Parking aid, see PDC 202 Parking assistant 208 Parking brake 125 Parking lights 163 Parts and accessories 10 Passenger's side mirror, tilting 110

Pathway lines, rearview camera 207 PDC Park Distance Control 202 Pedestrian protection, acoustic 124 Performance Control 191 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 89 Picnic Bench 238 Plastic, care 316 Poor roads, driving on 246 PostCrash — iBrake 188 POWER, driving with combustion en-

gine 124 Power failure 304 Power windows 95 Pressure, tires 268 Pressure warning, tires 178 Printed onboard literature 67 Profiles, see Driver profiles 89 Programmable memory buttons, Central In-

formation Display (CID) 50 Protective function, glass sunroof 98 Protective function, windows 96 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 46

Q

Quick charging cable, see Level 2 chargingcable 256

R

Racetrack operation 246 Radiator fluid 292 Radio-ready state 118 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 8 Rain sensor 129, 132 Ratchet straps 234 Rear lights 301 Rear seats 103 Rearview camera 205 Rear window defroster 215, 219 Rear window wiper, operation 130, 133 Recirculated-air filter 219 Recirculated-air mode 214, 218 Recommended fuel grade 267

Seite 332



Recommended tire brands 273 Refueling 263 Remaining range 149 Remote control, universal 222 Replacing parts 296 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 79 Replacing wheels/tires 273 Reporting safety malfunctions 15 RES CNCL button, see Camera-based cruise

control 193 RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 200 Reserve warning, see Range 149 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 174 Retreaded tires 274 Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis-

tance 306 Roadside parking lights 164 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 223 RON recommended fuel grade 267 Roofliner 43 Roof-mounted luggage rack 245 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook


RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflattires 274

Rubber components, care 316 Runflat tires 274

S

Safe braking 244 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and

front passenger seat 106 Safety belts 104 Safety belts, care 316 Safety locks, doors, and windows 117 Safety of the hybrid system 72 Safety switch, windows 96 Safety systems, airbags 169 SAVE BATTERY, electric driving 123 Saving fuel 247 Screen, see Control Display 46 Screwdriver 296 Sealant, see Mobility System 275 Seat heating, front 103

Seating position for children 112 Seat, see Memory function 108 Seats, front 100 Seats, rear 103 Securing cargo 234 Selection list in instrument cluster 153 Sensors, care 317 Service and warranty 11 Service requirements, Condition Based

Service CBS 294 Service requirements, display 150 Servotronic 192 SET button, see Camera-based cruise con-

trol 193 SET button, see Cruise control 200 Settings, locking/unlocking 91 Settings, mirrors 109 Settings on the Control Display 55 Shift gate rotary switch 191 Side airbag 169 Signaling, horn 40 Signals when unlocking 93 Sitting safely 100 Size 320 Slide/tilt glass roof 97 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

SMS text messages, supplementary 147 Snow chains 279 Socket 227 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 295 Software update 65 SOS button 307 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for


Speed, average 155 Speed Limit Info 151 Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 155 Speed limits, display 151 Speed warning 157 Split screen 45 Sport displays 156 SPORT program, driving dynamics 192 Sport program, transmission 138

Seite 333



Stability control systems 189 Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charg-

ing cable 256 Standard charging, see Level 1 charg-

ing 260 Standard equipment 9 Standard view, Head-up Display 159 Start/Stop button 118 Starting of combustion engine 120 Stationary climate control 220 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook


Status control display, tires 173 Status information, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 45 Status of Owner's Manual 10 Status, vehicle 161 Steering assistance 192 Steering wheel, adjusting 111 Steptronic transmission 136 Storage compartments 230 Storage, tires 274 Storing the charging cable, see Storage 257 Storing the vehicle 317 Stowing and securing cargo 234 Suitable devices 60 Suitable mobile phones 60 Summer tires, tread 272 Sun visor 227 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 67 Supplementary SMS text messages 147 Switch for driving dynamics 191 Switch, see Cockpit 40 Symbols 9

T

Tailgate 86 Tailgate, closing with no-touch activa-

tion 84 Tailgate, opening with no-touch activa-

tion 84 Tailgate via remote control 78 Tail lights 301 Tank unlocking, see Tank vent 263

Tank vent 263 Technical changes, see For Your Own

Safety 10 Technical data 320 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for


Temperature, air conditioner 214 Temperature, automatic climate con-

trol 216 Temperature display for external tempera-

ture 148 Temperature, engine 155 Terminal, starting aid 309 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 93 Thigh support 103 Tilt alarm sensor 94 Tilting, passenger's side mirror 110 Time 55 Time of arrival 155 Tire damage 272 Tire identification marks 270 Tire inflation pressure 268 Tire inflation pressure monitor, see

FTM 178 Tire pressure 268 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 173 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 275 Tires, changing 273 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 275 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 268 Tires, runflat 274 Tire tread 272 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 8 Tools 296 Total vehicle weight 321 Touchscreen 49 Towing 310 Tow-starting 310 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 173 Traction control 190 TRACTION driving mode, driving dynam-

ics 190

Seite 334



Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook forNavigation, Entertainment, Communica-tion 8

Transmission lock, releasing manually 139 Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-

sion 136 Transporting children safely 112 Tread, tires 272 Trip computer 155 Triple turn signal activation 127 Trip odometer 148 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 148 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 207 Turn signal, front 298, 300 Turn signal, indicator light 146 Turn signal, side 303 Turn signals, operation 127 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 301

U

Unintentional alarm 94 Units of measurement 56 Universal remote control 222 Unlocking, automatic 92 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 76 Unlocking, settings 91 Updates made after the editorial dead-

line 10 Upholstery care 315 USB connection 62 USB interface, position in vehicle 228 USB port, see USB interface 228 Used battery, disposing of 304 Use, intended 10 Using a smartphone via voice activation 53

V

Vanity mirror 227 Vehicle battery 303 Vehicle, break-in 242 Vehicle care 314 Vehicle care products 314 Vehicle features and options 9

Vehicle identification number 15 Vehicle jack 282 Vehicle key, additional 79 Vehicle key, loss 79 Vehicle key, malfunction 79 Vehicle key, opening/closing 76 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 79 Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 76 Vehicle paint 315 Vehicle position, vehicle location 56 Vehicle status 161 Vehicle wash 314 Vehicle wash, automatic 314 Vehicle, washing 313 Ventilation 219 Venting, see Stationary climate control 220 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15 Voice activation system 51 Voice command response, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

W

Warning and indicator lights, see CheckControl 144

Warning displays, see Check Control 144 Warning messages, see Check Control 144 Warning triangle 306 Warranty 10 Washer fluid 135 Washer nozzles, windshield 130, 133 Washing the vehicle 313 Water, hybrid system 72 Water on roads 243 Weights 321 Welcome lights 164 Welcome lights during unlocking 77 Wheel cleaner 315 Wheels, changing 273 Wheels, everything on wheels and

tires 268 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 178 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 173 Windows, powered 95 Windshield cleaning system 128, 131

Seite 335



Windshield defroster 215, 219 Windshield washer fluid 135 Windshield washer nozzles 130, 133 Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-

tion 130, 134 Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-

tem 128, 131 Winter storage, care 317 Winter tires, suitable tires 274 Winter tires, tread 272 Wiper blades, replacing 296 Wiper fluid 135 Wiper system 128, 131 Wireless charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray, see Owner'sManual for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manualfor Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-cation 8

Wood, care 316 Word match concept, navigation 44 Working on the hybrid system 72 Wrench 296

Seite 336



01402628632 ue

*BL262863200Z*

California Proposition 65Warning

For vehicles sold in California:


MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

01402628632 ue

*BL262863200Z*


mini countryman plug-in hybrid. owner's manual....welcome to mini. owner's manual. mini...

Documents